VOLVO C30
Owner's manual Web Edition
Welcome to the world-wide family of Volvo owners. We trust
that you will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an
automobile designed with your safety and comfort in mind. We
encourage you to familiarize yourself with the equipment
descriptions and operating instructions in this manual. We also
urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times in
this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate
a vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any
impairment that could hinder your ability to drive.
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable safety and emis-
sion standards. For further information please contact your
retailer, or:
In the USA: Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Customer Care
Center
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647-0914
1-800-458-1552
www.volvocars.us
In Canada: Volvo Cars of Canada Corp
National Customer Service
175 Gordon Baker Road
North York, Ontario M2H 2N7
1-800-663-8255
www.volvocanada.com
2008 © Volvo Car Corporation, All rights reserved.
Contents
4
00
00 Introduction
General information.................................. 10
Volvo and the environment....................... 12
Important warnings................................... 13
01
01 Safety
Occupant safety........................................ 16
Seat belts.................................................. 18
Supplemental Restraint System............... 21
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS).............. 26
Side impact protection airbags................. 29
Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC).................... 30
Whiplash Protection System..................... 32
Crash mode.............................................. 34
Child safety............................................... 35
Child restraint systems............................. 37
Infant seats............................................... 39
Convertible seats...................................... 41
Booster cushions...................................... 43
ISOFIX lower anchors............................... 44
Top tether anchors.................................... 45
Child restraint registration and recalls...... 46
02
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument overview.................................. 50
Instrument panel....................................... 53
Indicator and warning symbols................. 55
Symbols – instrument panel..................... 57
Information display................................... 60
12-volt sockets......................................... 62
Lighting panel........................................... 63
Left-side steering wheel lever................... 65
Trip computer........................................... 67
Cruise control (option)............................... 69
Right-side steering wheel lever................. 71
Steering wheel adjustment, Hazard warn-
ing flashers................................................ 74
Parking brake............................................ 75
Power windows......................................... 76
Mirrors....................................................... 77
Power moonroof (option).......................... 80
Personal settings...................................... 82
HomeLink® Wireless Control System
(option)...................................................... 85
Contents
5
03
03 Climate
General information.................................. 90
Air vents.................................................... 92
Manual climate control.............................. 93
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) –
option........................................................ 96
Air distribution........................................... 99
04
04 Interior
Front seats.............................................. 102
Interior lighting........................................ 106
Storage compartments........................... 107
Rear seat................................................. 111
Cargo area.............................................. 113
05
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control and key blade................ 118
Keyless drive (option as available).......... 123
Locking and unlocking............................ 127
Alarm (option).......................................... 129
Contents
6
06
06 Starting and driving
General information................................ 134
Fuel requirements................................... 138
Ignition switch......................................... 141
Starting the vehicle................................. 142
Starting the vehicle with keyless drive
(option as available)................................ 144
Manual transmission, 6-speed (certain
markets only)........................................... 145
Automatic transmission (option)............. 146
Shiftlock override.................................... 148
Brake system.......................................... 149
Stability system....................................... 151
Towing.................................................... 153
Jump starting.......................................... 155
Transporting loads.................................. 156
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)–
option...................................................... 157
Park assist (Option/accessory)............... 161
07
07 Wheels and tires
General information................................ 166
Tire inflation............................................. 168
Inflation pressure—U.S. models ............ 170
Inflation pressure—Canadian models .... 171
Tire designations..................................... 172
Glossary of tire terminology.................... 174
Vehicle loading........................................ 175
Uniform tire quality gradings................... 176
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires. . 177
Temporary spare..................................... 178
Wheel nuts.............................................. 179
Tire rotation............................................. 180
Changing a wheel................................... 181
Tire Sealing System ............................... 183
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 188
08
08 Car care
Washing and cleaning the car................. 192
Paint touch up......................................... 196
Contents
7
09
09 Maintenance and servicing
Volvo maintenance.................................. 200
Maintaining your car............................... 202
Hood....................................................... 204
Engine compartment............................... 205
Engine oil................................................ 206
Fluids....................................................... 208
Wiper blades........................................... 210
Battery..................................................... 211
Replacing bulbs...................................... 213
Fuses....................................................... 221
10
10 Audio
Audio functions....................................... 230
Radio functions....................................... 234
CD player/CD changer............................ 239
Audio menu............................................. 243
Bluetooth hands-free connection......... 244
11
11 Specifications
Label information.................................... 252
Dimensions and weights......................... 254
Fuel, oils, and fluids................................ 257
Engine oil................................................ 259
Engine specifications.............................. 260
Electrical system..................................... 262
Three-way catalytic converter................. 264
Volvo programs....................................... 265
Contents
8
12
12 Index
Index....................................................... 266
Contents
9
Introduction
General information
10
Shiftlock (automatic transmission)
When your car is parked, the gear selector is
locked in the Park (P) position. To release the
selector from this position, turn the ignition key
to position II (or start the engine), depress the
brake pedal, press the button on the front side
of the gear selector and move the selector from
Park (P).
Keylock (automatic transmission)
When the ignition is switched off, the gear
selector must be in the Park (P) position before
the key can be removed from the ignition
switch.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
The ABS system in your car performs a self-
diagnostic test when the vehicle first reaches
the speed of approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several
times and a sound may be audible from the
ABS control module. This is normal.
Fuel filler door
Press the button on the light switch panel when
the car is at a standstill to open the fuel filler
door.
Fuel filler cap
After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turn-
ing it clockwise until it clicks into place. If this
cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is run-
ning when the car is refueled, the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp ("Check Engine" light) may
indicate a fault.
About this manual
•
Before you operate your vehicle for the first
time, please familiarize yourself with the
new-engine oil consumption information,
see page 206. You should also be familiar
with the information found in the chapters
"Instruments and controls", and "Starting
and driving".
•
Information contained in the balance of the
manual is extremely useful and should be
read after operating the vehicle for the first
time.
•
The manual is structured so that it can be
used for reference. For this reason, it
should be kept in the vehicle for ready
access.
NOTE
•
Optional or accessory equipment
described in this manual may not be
available in all countries or markets.
Please note that some vehicles may be
equipped differently, depending on
special legal requirements.
•
All information, illustrations and specifi-
cations contained in this manual are
based on the latest product information
available at the time of publication.
•
Volvo reserves the right to make model
changes at any time, or to change spec-
ifications or design without notice and
without incurring obligation.
•
Do not export your Volvo to another
country before investigating that coun-
try's applicable safety and emission
control requirements. In some cases it
may be difficult or impossible to comply
with these requirements. Modifications
to the emission control system(s) may
render your Volvo not certifiable for
legal operation in the U.S., Canada and
other countries.
Introduction
General information
11
WARNING
If your vehicle is involved in an accident,
unseen damage may affect its driveability
and safety.
WARNING
CALIFORNIA proposition 65
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the state of Cali-
fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain
fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of Cali-
fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
12
Volvo is committed to the well being of its cus-
tomers. As a natural part of this commitment,
we care about the environment in which we all
live. Caring for the environment means an
everyday involvement in reducing our environ-
mental impact. Volvo's environmental activities
are based on a holistic view, which means we
consider the overall environmental impact of a
product throughout its complete life cycle. In
this context, design, production, product use,
and recycling are all important considerations.
In production, Volvo has partly or completely
phased out several chemicals including CFCs,
lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and
reduced the number of chemicals used in our
plants 50% since 1991.
Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into
production a three-way catalytic converter with
a Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen
sensor, in 1976. The current version of this
highly efficient system reduces emissions of
harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the
exhaust pipe by approximately 95 – 99% and
the search to eliminate the remaining emis-
sions continues. Volvo is the only automobile
manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for
the air conditioning system of all models as far
back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced elec-
tronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are
bringing us closer to our goal. After Volvo vehi-
cles and parts have fulfilled their use, recycling
is the next critical step in completing the life
cycle. The metal content is about 75% of the
total weight of a vehicle, which makes the vehi-
cle among the most recycled industrial prod-
ucts. In order to have efficient and well-
controlled recycling, dismantling information is
available for all Volvo models. For Volvo, all
homogeneous plastic parts weighing more
than 3.4 oz. (100 grams) are marked with inter-
national symbols that indicate how the com-
ponent is to be sorted for recycling. In addition
to continuous environmental refinement of
conventional gasoline-powered internal com-
bustion engines, Volvo is actively looking at
advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles.
When you drive a Volvo, you become our part-
ner in the work to lessen the car's impact on
the environment. To reduce your vehicle's
environmental impact, you can:
•
Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.
Tests have shown decreased fuel econ-
omy with improperly inflated tires.
•
Follow the recommended maintenance
schedule in your Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet.
•
Drive at a constant speed whenever pos-
sible.
•
See a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician as soon as possible for inspec-
tion if the check engine (malfunction indi-
cator) light illuminates, or stays on after the
vehicle has started.
•
Properly dispose of any vehicle-related
waste such as used motor oil, used batter-
ies, brake pads, etc.
•
When cleaning your vehicle, please use
genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo
car care products are formulated to be
environmentally friendly.
For additional information regarding the envi-
ronmental activities in which Volvo Cars of
North America, LLC and Volvo Car Corporation
are involved, visit our Internet home page at:
http://www.volvocars.us.
WARNING
Certain components of this vehicle such as
air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners,
adaptive steering columns, and button cell
batteries may contain Perchlorate material.
Special handling may apply for service or
vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
Introduction
Important warnings
13
Accessory Installation
•
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners
install only genuine, Volvo-approved
accessories, and that accessory installa-
tions be performed only by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
•
Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to
ensure compatibility with the performance,
safety, and emission systems in your vehi-
cle. Additionally, a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician knows where
accessories may and may not be safely
installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please
consult a trained and qualified Volvo serv-
ice technician before installing any acces-
sory in or on your vehicle.
•
Accessories that have not been approved
by Volvo may or may not be specifically
tested for compatibility with your vehicle.
Additionally, an inexperienced installer
may not be familiar with some of your vehi-
cle's systems.
•
Any of your vehicle's performance and
safety systems could be adversely affec-
ted if you install accessories that Volvo has
not tested, or if you allow accessories to be
installed by someone unfamiliar with your
vehicle.
•
Damage caused by unapproved or
improperly installed accessories may not
be covered by your new vehicle warranty.
See your Warranty and Service Records
Information booklet for more warranty
information. Volvo assumes no responsi-
bility for death, injury, or expenses that
may result from the installation of nonge-
nuine accessories.
Driver distraction
•
Driver distraction results from driver activ-
ities that are not directly related to control-
ling the vehicle in the driving environment.
Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped
with many feature-rich entertainment and
communication systems. These include
hands-free cellular telephones, navigation
systems, and multipurpose audio systems.
You may also own other portable elec-
tronic devices for your own convenience.
When used properly and safely, they enrich
the driving experience. Improperly used,
any of these could cause a distraction.
•
For all of these systems, we want to pro-
vide the following warning that reflects the
strong Volvo concern for your safety:
•
Never use these devices or any feature of
your vehicle in a way that distracts you
from the task of driving safely. Distraction
can lead to a serious accident. In addition
to this general warning, we offer the fol-
lowing guidance regarding specific newer
features that may be found in your vehicle:
•
Never use a hand-held cellular telephone
while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit
cellular telephone use by a driver while the
vehicle is moving.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga-
tion system, set and make changes to your
travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked.
•
Never program your audio system while
the vehicle is moving. Program radio pre-
sets with the vehicle parked, and use your
programmed presets to make radio use
quicker and simpler.
•
Never use portable computers or personal
digital assistants while the vehicle is mov-
ing.
A driver has a responsibility to do everything
possible to ensure his or her own safety and
the safety of passengers in the vehicle and oth-
ers sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions
is part of that responsibility.
G020871
14
Occupant safety...................................................................................... 16
Seat belts................................................................................................ 18
Supplemental Restraint System.............................................................. 21
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS)............................................................. 26
Side impact protection airbags............................................................... 29
Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC).................................................................. 30
Whiplash Protection System................................................................... 32
Crash mode............................................................................................. 34
Child safety............................................................................................. 35
Child restraint systems........................................................................... 37
Infant seats.............................................................................................. 39
Convertible seats.................................................................................... 41
Booster cushions.................................................................................... 43
ISOFIX lower anchors............................................................................. 44
Top tether anchors.................................................................................. 45
Child restraint registration and recalls.................................................... 46
01
SAFETY
01 Safety
Occupant safety
01
16
Volvo's concern for safety
Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. Our concern
dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled
off the production line. Three-point seat belts
(a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energy-
absorbing impact zones were designed into
Volvo cars long before it was fashionable or
required by government regulation.
We will not compromise our commitment to
safety. We continue to seek out new safety
features and to refine those already in our cars.
You can help. We would appreciate hearing
your suggestions about improving automobile
safety. We also want to know if you ever have
a safety concern with your car. Call us in the
U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at:
1-800-663-8255.
Occupant safety reminders
How safely you drive doesn't depend on how
old you are but rather on:
•
How well you see.
•
Your ability to concentrate.
•
How quickly you make decisions under
stress to avoid an accident.
The following suggestions are intended to help
you cope with the ever changing trafficenvir-
onment.
•
Never drink and drive.
•
If you are taking any medication, consult
your physician about its potential effects
on your driving abilities.
•
Take a driver-retraining course.
•
Have your eyes checked regularly.
•
Keep your windshield and headlights
clean.
•
Replace wiper blades when they start to
leave streaks.
•
Take into account the traffic, road, and
weather conditions, particularly with
regard to stopping distance.
Reporting safety defects in the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Volvo Cars of North Amer-
ica, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your retailer, or Volvo
Cars of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either
call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans-
portation, Washington D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from:
http://www.safercar.gov
Volvo strongly recommends that if your vehicle
is covered under a service campaign, safety or
emission recall or similar action, it should be
completed as soon as possible. Please check
with your local retailer or Volvo Cars of North
America, LLC if your vehicle is covered under
these conditions.
NHTSA can be reached at:
Internet:
http://www.nhtsa.gov
Telephone:
01 Safety
Occupant safety
01
17
1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Reporting safety defects in Canada
If you believe your vehicle has a defect that
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform Trans-
port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Cars
of Canada Corp.
To contact Transport Canada, call (800)
333-0510, or (613) 993-9851 if you are calling
from the Ottawa region.
01 Safety
Seat belts
01
18
Using seat belts
G020104
Adjusting the seat belt
Seat belts should always be worn by all occu-
pants of your vehicle. Children should be prop-
erly restrained, using an infant, car, or booster
seat determined by age, weight and height.
Volvo also believes no child should sit in the
front seat of a vehicle.
Most states and provinces make it mandatory
for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.
Seat belt pretensioners
All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners
that reduce slack in the belts. These preten-
sioners are triggered in situations where the
front or side impact airbags deploy, and in cer-
tain impacts from the rear. The front seat belts
also include a tension reducing device which,
in the event of a collision, limits the peak forces
exerted by the seat belt on the occupant.
Buckling a seat belt
Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch
plate into the receptacle until a distinct click is
heard. The seat belt retractor is normally
"unlocked" and you can move freely, provided
that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far.
NOTE
The seat belt is easiest to reach by grasping
it near the lower seat belt guide, not over the
shoulder.
The retractor will lock up as follows:
•
if the belt is pulled out rapidly
•
during braking and acceleration
•
if the vehicle is leaning excessively
•
when driving in turns
When wearing the seat belt remember:
•
The belt should not be twisted or turned.
•
The lap section of the belt must be posi-
tioned low on the hips (not pressing against
the abdomen).
•
Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled
up into its retractor and that the shoulder
and lap belts are taut.
Unbuckling the seat belt
•
To remove the seat belt, press the red sec-
tion on the seat belt receptacle. Before
exiting the vehicle, check that the seat belt
retracts fully after being unbuckled. If nec-
essary, guide the belt back into the retrac-
tor slot.
WARNING
Never use a seat belt for more than one
occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion
of the belt under the arm, behind the back
or otherwise out of position. Such use could
cause injury in the event of an accident. As
seat belts lose much of their strength when
exposed to violent stretching, they should
be replaced after any collision, even if they
appear to be undamaged.
01 Safety
Seat belts
01
``
19
WARNING
•
Never repair the belt yourself; have this
work done by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician only.
•
Any device used to induce slack into the
shoulder belt portion of the three-point
belt system will have a detrimental
effect on the amount of protection avail-
able to you in the event of a collision.
•
The seat back should not be tilted too
far back. The shoulder belt must be taut
in order to function properly.
•
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that children who have outgrown these
devices sit in the rear seat with the seat
belt properly fastened.
Seat belt guides
G020106
Seat belt guides (on both front seats)
These guides are designed to help provide
easier access to the seat belts. A belt can be
taken out of the guide and slid to the rearmost
part of the lower seat belt anchorage rod to
make it easier for passengers to enter or exit
the rear seat.
Seat belt use during pregnancy
G020105
The seat belt should always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the
correct way. The diagonal section should wrap
over the shoulder then be routed between the
breasts and to the side of the belly. The lap
section should lay flat over the thighs and as
low as possible under the belly. It must never
be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack
from the belt and insure that it fits close to the
body without any twists.
As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel
such that they can easily maintain control of the
vehicle as they drive (which means they must
be able to easily operate the foot pedals and
01 Safety
Seat belts
01
20
steering wheel). Within this context, they
should strive to position the seat with as large
a distance as possible between their belly and
the steering wheel.
Child seats
Please refer to page 37 for information on
securing child seats with the seat belts.
Seat belt reminder
G018084
Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console
The seat belt reminder consists of an audible
signal, an indicator light near the rearview mir-
ror and a symbol in the instrument panel that
alert all occupants of the vehicle if their seat
belts are not fastened. These signals will last
for approximately 6 seconds.
Rear seats
The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has two
additional functions:
•
It provides information about which seat
belts are fastened in the rear seat. A mes-
sage will appear in the information display
when a belt is being used. This message
will disappear after approximately 30 sec-
onds or can be erased by pressing the
READ button on the left steering wheel
lever.
•
It also provides a reminder if one of the
occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled
his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in
motion. A visual and audible signal will be
given. These signals will stop when the
seat belt has been re-buckled or can be
stopped by pressing the READ button.
The message in the information display can
always be accessed, even if it has been erased,
by pressing the READ button to display stored
messages.
Seat belt maintenance
Check periodically that the seat belts are in
good condition. Use water and a mild deter-
gent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism
function as follows: attach the seat belt and pull
rapidly on the strap.
01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System
01
``
21
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
G026330
SRS warning light
As an enhancement to the three-point seat
belts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supple-
mental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRS
consists of seat belt pretensioners, front air-
bags, side impact airbags, the occupant
weight sensor, and inflatable curtains. All of
these systems are monitored by the SRS con-
trol module. An SRS warning light in the instru-
ment panel (see the illustration) illuminates
when the ignition key is turned to position I, II,
or III, and will normally go out after approxi-
mately 7 seconds if no faults are detected in
the system.
Where applicable, a text message will also be
displayed when the SRS warning light illumi-
nates. If this warning symbol is not functioning
properly, the general warning symbol
illuminates and either SRS AIRBAG
SERVICE URGENT
or SRS AIRBAG
SERVICE REQUIRED
will be displayed.
WARNING
•
If the SRS warning light stays on after
the engine has started or if it illuminates
while you are driving, have the vehicle
inspected by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician as soon as
possible.
•
Never try to repair any component or
part of the SRS yourself. Any interfer-
ence in the system could cause mal-
function and serious injury. All work on
these systems should be performed by
a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
WARNING
If your vehicle has been subjected to flood
conditions (e.g. soaked carpeting/standing
water on the floor of the vehicle) or if your
vehicle has become flood-damaged in any
way, do not attempt to start the vehicle or
put the key in the ignition before discon-
necting the battery (see below). This may
cause airbag deployment which could result
in personal injury. Have the vehicle towed to
a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-
nician for repairs.
Automatic transmission
Before attempting to tow the vehicle, use
the following procedure to override the
shiftlock system to move the gear selector
to the neutral position:
1. Switch off the ignition for at least
10 minutes and disconnect the battery.
2. Wait at least one minute.
3. Insert the key in the ignition and turn it
to position II.
4. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
5.
Move the gear selector from Park (P) to
the Neutral (N) position, see page 148,
for information on manually overriding
the shiftlock system.
01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System
01
22
The front airbag system
G020111
The front airbags supplement the three-point
seat belts. For these airbags to provide the
protection intended, seat belts must be worn
at all times.
The front airbag system includes gas genera-
tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera-
tion sensors that activate the gas generators,
causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogen
gas.
G015167
Location of the passenger's side front airbag
As the movement of the seats' occupants com-
presses the airbags, some of the gas is expel-
led at a controlled rate to provide better
cushioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also
deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire
process, including inflation and deflation of the
airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a sec-
ond.
The location of the front airbags is indicated by
SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel
pad and above the glove compartment, and by
decals on both sun visors and on the front and
far right side of the dash.
•
The driver's side front airbag is folded and
located in the steering wheel hub.
•
The passenger's side front airbag is folded
behind a panel located above the glove
compartment.
01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System
01
``
23
WARNING
•
The airbags in the vehicle are designed
to be a SUPPLEMENT to-not a replace-
ment for-the three-point seat belts. For
maximum protection, wear seat belts at
all times. Be aware that no system can
prevent all possible injuries that may
occur in an accident.
•
Never drive a vehicle with a steering
wheel-mounted airbag with your hands
on the steering wheel pad/airbag hous-
ing.
•
The front airbags are designed to help
prevent serious injury. Deployment
occurs very quickly and with consider-
able force. During normal deployment
and depending on variables such as
seating position, one may experience
abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other
injuries as a result from deployment of
one or both of the airbags.
•
When installing any accessory equip-
ment, make sure that the front airbag
system is not damaged. Any interfer-
ence in the system could cause mal-
function.
Front airbag deployment
•
The front airbags are designed to deploy
during certain frontal or front-angular col-
lisions, impacts, or decelerations, depend-
ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and
object impacted. The airbags may also
deploy in certain non-frontal collisions
where rapid deceleration occurs.
•
The SRS sensors, which trigger the front
airbags, are designed to react to both the
impact of the collision and the inertial
forces generated by it, and to determine if
the intensity of the collision is sufficient for
the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags
to be deployed.
However, not all frontal collisions activate the
front airbags.
•
If the collision involves a nonrigid object
(e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed
object at a low speed, the front airbags will
not necessarily deploy.
•
Front airbags do not normally deploy in a
side impact collision, in a collision from the
rear or in a rollover situation.
•
The amount of damage to the bodywork
does not reliably indicate if the airbags
should have deployed or not.
NOTE
•
Deployment of front airbags occurs only
one time during an accident. In a colli-
sion where deployment occurs, the air-
bags and seat belt pretensioners acti-
vate. Some noise occurs and a small
amount of powder is released. The
release of the powder may appear as
smoke-like matter. This is a normal
characteristic and does not indicate fire.
•
Volvo's front airbags use special sen-
sors that are integrated with the front
seat buckles. The point at which the air-
bag deploys is determined by whether
or not the seat belt is being used, as well
as the severity of the collision.
•
Collisions can occur where only one of
the airbags deploys. If the impact is less
severe, but severe enough to present a
clear injury risk, the airbags are trig-
gered at partial capacity. If the impact is
more severe, the airbags are triggered
at full capacity.
Should you have questions about any compo-
nent in the SRS system, please contact a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
or Volvo Customer Support:
In the USA
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System
01
24
Customer Care Center
P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey
07647-0914
1-800-458-1552
www.volvocars.us
In Canada
Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.
National Customer Service
175 Gordon Baker Road
North York, Ontario M2H 2N7
1-800-663-8255
www.volvocanada.com
WARNING
•
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) in height who have outgrown
these devices sit in the rear seat with the
seat belt fastened
1
.
•
Never drive with the airbags deployed.
The fact that they hang out can impair
the steering of your vehicle. Other
safety systems can also be damaged.
•
The smoke and dust formed when the
airbags are deployed can cause skin
and eye irritation in the event of pro-
longed exposure.
G032243
Airbag decal in the front passenger's door opening
1
See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information on page 26.
01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System
01
25
G032525
Airbag decal on passenger's side dashboard
G032934
Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors
WARNING
•
Children must never be allowed in the
front passenger's seat. Volvo recom-
mends that ALL occupants (adults and
children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) be seated in the back seat of
any vehicle with a passenger-side front
airbag. See page 36 for guidelines.
•
Occupants in the front passenger's seat
must never sit on the edge of the seat,
sit leaning toward the instrument panel
or otherwise sit out of position.
•
The occupant's back must be as upright
as comfort allows and be against the
seat back with the seat belt properly
fastened.
•
Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on
the dash, seat or out of the window.
WARNING
•
No objects or accessory equipment,
e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed
on, attached to, or installed near the air
bag hatch (the area above the glove
compartment) or the area affected by
airbag deployment.
•
There should be no loose articles, e.g.
coffee cups, on the floor, seat, or dash-
board area.
•
Never try to open the airbag cover on
the steering wheel or the passenger's
side dashboard. This should only be
done by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
•
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the vehicle occupants.
01 Safety
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS)
01
26
Disabling the passenger's side front
airbag
2
G018082
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light
Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults
and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches
(140 cm) be seated in the rear seat of any vehi-
cle with a passenger's side front airbag, and be
properly restrained. Children should always be
seated in child restraints appropriate for their
size and weight. See also the child safety rec-
ommendations on page 35.
The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is
designed to meet the regulatory requirements
of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will
not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag
under certain conditions.
The OWS works with sensors that are part of
the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The
sensors are designed to detect the presence of
a properly seated occupant and determine if
the passenger's side front airbag should be
enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not
inflate).
The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas-
senger's side front airbag when:
•
the front passenger's seat is unoccupied,
or has small/medium objects in the front
seat,
•
the system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat that is
installed according to the manufacturer's
instructions,
•
the system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint
that is installed according to the manufac-
turer's instructions,
•
the system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat,
•
a front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time,
•
a child or a small person occupies the front
passenger's seat.
The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on
to remind you that the passenger's side front
airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF indicator lamp is located in the overhead
console, near the base of the rearview mirror.
NOTE
When the ignition is switched on, the OWS
indicator light will go on for up to 10 seconds
while the system performs a self-diagnostic
test.
However, if a fault is detected in the system:
•
The OWS indicator light will stay on
•
The SRS warning light (see page 21) will
come on and stay on
The message PASS. AIRBAG OFF SERVICE
URGENT
will be displayed in the information
display.
01 Safety
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS)
01
``
27
WARNING
If a fault in the system is detected and indi-
cated as explained on the preceding page,
be aware that the passenger's side front air-
bag will not deploy in the event of a collision.
In this case, the SRS system and Occupant
Weight Sensor should be inspected by a
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian as soon as possible.
WARNING
•
Never try to open, remove, or repair any
components in the OWS system. This
could result in system malfunction.
Maintenance or repairs should only be
carried out by an a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
•
The front passenger's seat should not
be modified in any way. This could
reduce pressure on the seat cushion,
which might interfere with the OWS sys-
tem's function.
The OWS is designed to disable (will not inflate)
the passenger's side front airbag when a rear
facing infant seat, a forward-facing child
restraint, or a booster seat is detected. The
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will
illuminate and stay on to remind you that the
passenger's side front airbag is disabled (see
the following table).
Passenger's
seat occu-
pancy status
OWS indica-
tor light sta-
tus
Passenger's
side front
airbag sta-
tus
Seat unoc-
cupied
OWS indica-
tor light
lights up
Passenger's
side front
airbag disa-
bled
Seat occu-
pied by low
weight
occupant/
object
A
OWS indica-
tor light
lights up
Passenger's
side front
airbag disa-
bled
Seat occu-
pied by
heavy occu-
pant/object
OWS indica-
tor light
is
not lit
Passenger's
side front
airbag ena-
bled
A
Volvo recommends that children always be properly
restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do
not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled
unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit.
Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there is
any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side front air-
bag, move the child restraint to the rear seat.
The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate)
the passenger's side front airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the front passenger's seat.
The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp will be off and remain off.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible
that the person isn't sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens:
1. Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in an upright position.
2. Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the per-
son's legs comfortably extended.
3. Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and enable the pas-
senger's frontal airbag.
4.
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp remains on even after this, the person
should be advised to ride in the rear seat.
This condition reflects limitations of the OWS
classification capability. It does not indicate
OWS malfunction.
Modifications
If you are considering modifying your vehicle in
any way to accommodate a disability, for
01 Safety
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS)
01
28
example by altering or adapting the driver's or
front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag sys-
tems, please contact Volvo at:
In the USA
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
Customer Care Center
P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey
07647-0914
1-800-458-1552
In Canada
Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.
National Customer Service
175 Gordon Baker Road North York, Ontario
M2H 2N7
1-800-663-8255
WARNING
•
No objects that add to the total weight
on the seat should be placed on the
front passenger's seat. If a child is
seated in the front passenger's seat
with any additional weight, this extra
weight could cause the OWS system to
enable the airbag, which might cause it
to deploy in the event of a collision,
thereby injuring the child.
•
The seat belt should never be wrapped
around an object on the front passeng-
er's seat. This could interfere with the
OWS system's function.
•
The front passenger's seat belt should
never be used in a way that exerts more
pressure on the passenger than normal.
This could increase the pressure exer-
ted on the weight sensor by a child, and
could result in the airbag being enabled,
which might cause it to deploy in the
event of a collision, thereby injuring the
child.
WARNING
Keep the following points in mind with
respect to the OWS system. Failure to follow
these instructions could adversely affect the
system's function and result in serious injury
to the occupant of the front passenger's
seat:
•
The full weight of the front seat passen-
ger should always be on the seat cush-
ion. The passenger should never lift
him/herself off the seat cushion using
the armrest in the door or the center
console, by pressing the feet on the
floor, by sitting on the edge of the seat
cushion, or by pressing against the
backrest in a way that reduces pressure
on the seat cushion. This could cause
OWS to disable the passenger's side
front airbag.
•
Do not place any type of object on the
front passenger's seat in such a way
that jamming, pressing, or squeezing
occurs between the object and the front
seat, other than as a direct result of the
correct use of the Automatic Locking
Retractor/Emergency Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR/ELR) seat belt, see page 36.
•
No objects should be placed under the
front passenger's seat. This could inter-
fere with the OWS system's function.
01 Safety
Side impact protection airbags
01
29
Side impact airbags – front seats only
G020118
Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbag
As an enhancement to the structural side
impact protection built into your car, the car is
also equipped with Side Impact Protection
System (SIPS) airbags.
The SIPS airbag system is designed to help
increase occupant protection in the event of
certain side impact collisions. The SIPS air-
bags are designed to deploy only during cer-
tain side-impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and point of
impact.
G025315
SIPS airbag deployment
NOTE
SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs
only on the side of the vehicle affected by
the impact. The airbags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact situations.
Components in the SIPS airbag system
This SIPS airbag system consists of gas gen-
erators and side airbag modules built into the
outboard sides of both front seat backrests.
WARNING
•
The SIPS airbag system is a supple-
ment to the structural Side Impact Pro-
tection System and the three-point seat
belt system. It is not designed to deploy
during collisions from the front or rear of
the car or in rollover situations.
•
The use of seat covers on the front seats
may impede SIPS airbag deployment.
•
No objects, accessory equipment or
stickers may be placed on, attached to
or installed near the SIPS airbag system
or in the area affected by SIPS airbag
deployment.
•
Never try to open or repair any compo-
nents of the SIPS airbag system. This
should be done only by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
•
In order for the SIPS airbag to provide
its best protection, both front seat
occupants should sit in an upright posi-
tion with the seat belt properly fastened.
•
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the occupants of the
vehicle in the event of an accident.
01 Safety
Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC)
01
30
The Volvo Inflatable Curtain system
G007478
This system consists of inflatable curtains
located along the sides of the roof liners,
stretching from the center of both front side
windows to the rear edge of the rear side door
windows. It is designed to help protect the
heads of the occupants of the front and rear
seats in certain side impact collisions.
In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Cur-
tain (VIC) and the Side Impact Airbag System
(SIPS airbag) will deploy. The VIC and the SIPS
airbag deploy simultaneously.
NOTE
If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remains
inflated for approximately 3 seconds.
WARNING
•
The VIC system is a supplement to the
Side Impact Protection System. It is not
designed to deploy during collisions
from the front or rear of the car or in roll-
over situations.
•
Never try to open or repair any compo-
nents of the VIC system. This should be
done only by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
•
Never hang heavy items from the ceiling
handles. This could impede deployment
of the Inflatable curtain.
01 Safety
Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC)
01
31
WARNING
In order for the VIC to provide its best pro-
tection, all occupants of the vehicle should
sit in an upright position with the seat belt
properly fastened; adults using the seat belt
and children using the proper child restraint
system. Only adults should sit in the front
seats. Children must never be allowed in the
front passenger's seat, see page 36 for
guidelines. Failure to follow these instruc-
tions can result in injury to the vehicle occu-
pants in an accident.
01 Safety
Whiplash Protection System
01
32
Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) – front seats only
G020347
The WHIPS system consists of specially
designed hinges and brackets on the front seat
backrests designed to help absorb some of the
energy generated in a collision from the rear
(when the vehicle is "rearended").
In the event of a collision of this type, the hinges
and brackets of the front seat backrests are
designed to change position slightly to allow
the backrest/head restraint to help support the
occupant's head before moving slightly rear-
ward. This movement helps absorb some of
the forces that could result in whiplash.
WARNING
•
The WHIPS system is designed to sup-
plement the other safety systems in
your car. For this system to function
properly, the three-point seat belt must
be worn. Please be aware that no sys-
tem can prevent all possible injuries that
may occur in an accident.
•
The WHIPS system is designed to func-
tion in certain collisions from the rear,
depending on the crash severity, angle
and speed.
WARNING
•
Occupants in the front seats must never
sit out of position. The occupant's back
must be as upright as comfort allows
and be against the seat back with the
seat belt properly fastened.
•
If your car has been involved in a rear-
end collision, the front seat backrests
must be inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician, even
if the seats appear to be undamaged.
01 Safety
Whiplash Protection System
01
33
Certain components in the WHIPS sys-
tem may need to be replaced.
•
Do not attempt to service any compo-
nent in the WHIPS system yourself.
G020126
WARNING
Any contact between the front seat backr-
ests and the folded rear seat could impede
the function of the WHIPS system. If the rear
seat is folded down, the occupied front
seats must be adjusted forward so that they
do not touch the folded rear seat.
G020125
WARNING
•
Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind
the front seats could impede the func-
tion of the WHIPS system.
•
If the rear seat backrests are folded
down, cargo must be secured to pre-
vent it from sliding forward against the
front seat backrests in the event of a
collision from the rear. This could inter-
fere with the action of the WHIPS sys-
tem.
01 Safety
Crash mode
01
34
Driving after a collision
G026363
If the vehicle has been involved in a collision,
the text CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL may
appear in the information display. This indi-
cates that the vehicle's functionality has been
reduced.
This text can only be shown if the display is
undamaged and the vehicle's electrical system
is intact.
CRASH MODE is a feature that is triggered if
one or more of the safety systems (for example,
front or side airbags, an inflatable curtain, or
one or more of the seat belt pretensioners) has
deployed. The collision may have damaged an
important function in the vehicle, such as the
fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety sys-
tems, the brake system, etc.
WARNING
•
Never attempt to repair the vehicle
yourself or to reset the electrical system
after the vehicle has displayed CRASH
MODE SEE MANUAL
. This could
result in injury or improper system func-
tion.
•
Restoring the vehicle to normal operat-
ing mode should only be done by a
trained and qualified Volvo service tech-
nician.
•
After CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL
has been displayed, if you detect the
odor of fuel vapor, or see any signs of
fuel leakage, do not attempt to start the
vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately.
Attempting to start the vehicle
If damage to the vehicle is minor and there is
no fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the
vehicle. To do so:
1. Remove the ignition key or optional keyless
drive start control, see page 144.
2. Reinsert the key or start control in the igni-
tion switch. The vehicle will then attempt to
reset CRASH MODE to normal mode.
3. Try to start the vehicle.
Moving the vehicle
If the electrical system is able to reset system
status to normal (
CRASH MODE SEE
MANUAL
will no longer be displayed), the
vehicle may be moved carefully from its pres-
ent position, if for example, it is blocking traffic.
It should, however, not be moved farther than
is absolutely necessary.
WARNING
Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable
after CRASH MODE has been set, it should
not be driven or towed (pulled by another
vehicle). There may be concealed damage
that could make it difficult or impossible to
control. The vehicle should be transported
on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and quali-
fied Volvo service technician for inspection/
repairs.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
``
35
Children should be seated safely
Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint
systems for all occupants including children.
Remember that, regardless of age and size, a
child should always be properly restrained in a
car.
Your car is also equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH
attachments, which make it more convenient
to install child seats.
Some restraint systems for children are
designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap
belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.
Such child restraint systems can help protect
children in cars in the event of an accident only
if they are used properly. However, children
could be endangered in a crash if the child
restraints are not properly secured in the vehi-
cle. Failure to follow the installation instructions
for your child restraint can result in your child
striking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop.
Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable
substitute for a child restraint system. In an
accident, a child held in a person's arms can
be crushed between the vehicle's interior and
an unrestrained person. The child could also be
injured by striking the interior, or by being ejec-
ted from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver
or impact. The same can also happen if the
infant or child rides unrestrained on the seat.
Other occupants should also be properly
restrained to help reduce the chance of injuring
or increasing the injury of a child.
All states and provinces have legislation gov-
erning how and where children should be car-
ried in a car. Find out the regulations existing
in your state or province. Recent accident sta-
tistics have shown that children are safer in rear
seating positions than front seating positions
when properly restrained. A child restraint sys-
tem can help protect a child in a vehicle. Here's
what to look for when selecting a child restraint
system:
•
It should have a label certifying that it
meets applicable Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Can-
ada, CMVSS 213.
•
Make sure the child restraint system is
approved for the child's height, weight and
development – the label required by the
standard or regulation, or instructions for
infant restraints, typically provide this infor-
mation.
•
In using any child restraint system, we urge
you to carefully look over the instructions
that are provided with the restraint. Be sure
you understand them and can use the
device properly and safely in this vehicle.
A misused child restraint system can result
in increased injuries for both the infant or
child and other occupants in the vehicle.
When a child has outgrown the child safety
seat, you should use the rear seat with the
standard seat belt fastened. The best way to
help protect the child here is to place the child
on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly
located on the hips (see the illustration on page
43). Legislation in your state or province may
mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in
combination with the seat belt, depending on
the child's age and/or size. Please check local
regulations.
A specially designed and tested booster cush-
ion (not available in Canada) can be obtained
from your Volvo retailer for children weighing
33 – 80 lb. (15 – 36 kg) and 38-54 inches
(97 – 137 cm) in height.
WARNING
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend that
children under 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) in
height who have outgrown these devices sit
in the rear seat with the seat belt fastened.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
36
Automatic Locking Retractor/
Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/
ELR)
To make child seat installation easier, each
seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip-
ped with a locking mechanism to help keep the
seat belt taut.
When attaching the seat belt to a child
seat:
1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat
according to the child seat manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.
3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the
buckle (lock) in the usual way.
4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around
the child seat.
A sound from the seat belt retractor will be
audible at this time and is normal. The belt will
now be locked in place. This function is auto-
matically disabled when the seat belt is
unlocked and the belt is fully retracted.
WARNING
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend that
children who have outgrown these devices
sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly
fastened.
Volvo's recommendations
Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit
in the front seat of a car? It's quite simple really.
A front airbag is a very powerful device
designed, by law, to help protect an adult.
Because of the size of the airbag and its speed
of inflation, a child should never be placed in
the front seat, even if he or she is properly bel-
ted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo
has been an innovator in safety for over sev-
enty-five years, and we'll continue to do our
part. But we need your help. Please remember
to put your children in the back seat, and
buckle them up.
Volvo has some very specific
recommendations:
•
Always wear your seat belt.
•
Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety
device which, when used with a three-
point seat belt can help reduce serious
injuries during certain types of accidents.
Volvo recommends that you do not dis-
connect the airbag system in your vehicle.
•
Volvo strongly recommends that everyone
in the vehicle be properly restrained.
•
Volvo recommends that ALL occupants
(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet
7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back
seat of any vehicle with a front passenger
side airbag.
•
Drive safely!
01 Safety
Child restraint systems
01
``
37
Child restraints
G026319
Infant seat
There are three main types of child restraint
systems: infant seats, convertible seats, and
booster cushions. They are classified accord-
ing to the child's age and size.
The following section provides general infor-
mation on securing a child restraint using a
three-point seat belt. Refer to pages 44–
45 for information on securing a child restraint
using ISOFIX lower anchors and/or top tether
anchorages.
G026320
Convertible seat
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
Passenger airbag off symbol near the
rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles
equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If
the severity of an accident were to cause the
airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious
injury or death to a child seated in this posi-
tion.
G026321
Booster cushion
WARNING
Always refer to the child restraint manufac-
turer's instructions for detailed information
on securing the restraint.
01 Safety
Child restraint systems
01
38
WARNING
•
When not in use, keep the child restraint
system secured or remove it from the
passenger compartment to help pre-
vent it from injuring passengers in the
event of a sudden stop or collision.
•
A small child's head represents a con-
siderable part of its total weight and its
neck is still very weak. Volvo recom-
mends that children up to age 4 travel,
properly restrained, facing rearward. In
addition, Volvo recommends that chil-
dren should ride rearward facing, prop-
erly restrained, as long as possible.
01 Safety
Infant seats
01
``
39
Securing an infant seat with a seat belt
G026417
Do not place the infant seat in the front passeng-
er's seat
NOTE
Refer to pages 44–45 for information on
securing a child restraint using ISOFIX lower
anchors and/or top tether anchorages.
WARNING
•
An infant seat must be in the rear-facing
position only.
•
The infant seat should not be positioned
behind the driver's seat unless there is
adequate space for safe installation.
1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the
vehicle.
G026322
Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat
2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat
according to the manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
G026323
Fasten the seat belt
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the
rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles
equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If
the severity of an accident were to cause the
airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious
injury or death to a child seated in this posi-
tion.
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
01 Safety
Infant seats
01
40
G026324
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt
out as far as possible to activate the belt's
automatic locking function.
NOTE
The locking retractor will automatically
release when the seat belt is unbuckled and
allowed to retract fully.
5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the
seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound
from the seat belt retractor's automatic
locking function will be audible at this time
and is normal. The seat belt should now be
locked in place.
G026325
Ensure that the seat is securely in place
WARNING
It should not be possible to move the child
restraint more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in any
direction.
6. Push and pull the infant seat to ensure that
it is held securely in place by the seat belt.
7. The infant seat can be removed by unbuck-
ling the seat belt and letting it retract com-
pletely.
01 Safety
Convertible seats
01
``
41
Securing a convertible seat with a seat
belt
G026420
Do not place the convertible seat in the front pas-
senger's seat
NOTE
Refer to pages 44–45 for information on
securing a child restraint using ISOFIX lower
anchors and/or top tether anchorages.
Convertible seats can be used in either a for-
ward or rearward-facing position, depending
on the age and size of the child.
WARNING
Always use a convertible seat that is suita-
ble for the child's age and size. See the
convertible seat manufacturer's recommen-
dations.
G026320
Route the seat belt through the convertible seat
WARNING
A small child's head represents a consider-
able part of its total weight and its neck is
still very weak. Volvo recommends that chil-
dren up to age 4 travel, properly restrained,
facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recom-
mends that children should ride rearward
facing, properly restrained, as long as pos-
sible.
WARNING
•
Convertible child seats should be instal-
led in the rear seat only.
•
A rear-facing convertible seat should not
be positioned behind the driver's seat
unless there is adequate space for safe
installation.
1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat
of the vehicle.
01 Safety
Convertible seats
01
42
G026326
Fasten the seat belt
2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat
according to the manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt
out as far as possible to activate the belt's
automatic locking function.
NOTE
The locking retractor will automatically
release when the seat belt is unbuckled and
allowed to retract fully.
5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place,
let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A
sound from the seat belt retractor's auto-
matic locking function will be audible at this
time and is normal. The seat belt should
now be locked in place.
G026327
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt
6. Push and pull the convertible seat to
ensure that it is held securely in place by
the seat belt.
WARNING
It should not be possible to move the child
restraint more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in any
direction.
The convertible seat can be removed by
unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract
completely.
G026328
Ensure that the seat is securely in place
01 Safety
Booster cushions
01
43
Securing a booster cushion
G026314
Position the child correctly on the booster cushion
and fasten the seat belt
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
Passenger airbag off symbol near the
rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles
equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If
the severity of an accident were to cause the
airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious
injury or death to a child seated in this posi-
tion.
Booster cushions are recommended for chil-
dren who have outgrown convertible seats.
1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat
of the vehicle.
2. With the child properly seated on the
booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or
around the cushion according to the man-
ufacturer's instructions.
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and
fits snugly around the child.
WARNING
•
The hip section of the three-point seat
belt must fit snugly across the child's
hips, not across the stomach.
•
The shoulder section of the three-point
seat belt should be positioned across
the chest and shoulder.
•
The shoulder belt must never be placed
behind the child's back or under the
arm.
01 Safety
ISOFIX lower anchors
01
44
Using the ISOFIX lower child seat
anchors
G009182
Lower anchors for ISOFIX-equipped child
seats are located in both rear seating positions,
hidden below the backrest cushions. Symbols
on the seat back upholstery mark the anchor
positions (see the illustration).
To access the anchors:
1. Put the child restraint in position.
2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down
the seat cushion and locate the anchors by
feel.
3. Fasten the attachment on the child
restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX lower
anchors.
4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps
according to the manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
NOTE
•
Always follow your child seat manufac-
turer's installation instructions, and use
both ISOFIX lower anchors and top
tethers whenever possible.
WARNING
•
The ISOFIX lower child restraint
anchors are only intended for use with
child seats positioned in the left or right
seating positions.
G031682
Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX
lower anchors
WARNING
Be sure to fasten the attachment correctly
to the anchor (see the illustration). If the
attachment is not correctly fastened, the
child restraint may not be properly secured
in the event of a collision.
01 Safety
Top tether anchors
01
45
Top tether anchors
G015718
Top tether anchorage points
Volvo vehicles are equipped with child restraint
top tether anchorages in the rear seating posi-
tions. They are located on the rear sides of the
backrests.
Using the top tether anchorages
1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat.
2. Attach the hook to the anchorage.
G015719
Route the strap under the head restraint
WARNING
Be sure to fasten the child tether attachment
correctly to the anchor. If it is not correctly
fastened, the child seat may not be properly
restrained in the event of a collision.
3. Route the top tether strap under the head
restraint and fasten its attachment to the
anchorage.
4. Firmly tension the top tether strap accord-
ing to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Tension the top tether strap
only after the lower anchor straps or the
seat belt have been firmly tensioned.
See page 44 for information on securing the
child restraint to ISOFIX lower anchors.
WARNING
•
Never route a top tether strap over the
top or around the head restraint. It
should always be routed under the head
restraint.
•
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly fitted child restraints. Under
no circumstances are they to be used
for adult seat belts or harnesses. The
anchorages are not able to withstand
excessive forces on them in the event of
collision if full harness seat belts or adult
seat belts are installed to them. An adult
who uses a belt anchored in a child
restraint anchorage runs a great risk of
suffering severe injuries should a colli-
sion occur.
•
Do not install rear speakers that require
the removal of the top tether anchors or
interfere with the proper use of the top
tether strap.
01 Safety
Child restraint registration and recalls
01
46
Registering a child restraint
Child restraints could be recalled for safety
reasons. You must register your child restraint
to be reached in a recall. To stay informed
about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out
and return the registration card that comes
with new child restraints.
Child restraint recall information is readily avail-
able in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall
information in the U.S., call the U.S. Govern-
ment's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393.
In Canada, visit Transport Canada's Child
Safety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm.
01 Safety
01
47
G020901
48
Instrument overview................................................................................ 50
Instrument panel..................................................................................... 53
Indicator and warning symbols............................................................... 55
Symbols – instrument panel.................................................................... 57
Information display.................................................................................. 60
12-volt sockets........................................................................................ 62
Lighting panel.......................................................................................... 63
Left-side steering wheel lever................................................................. 65
Trip computer.......................................................................................... 67
Cruise control (option)............................................................................. 69
Right-side steering wheel lever............................................................... 71
Steering wheel adjustment, Hazard warning flashers............................. 74
Parking brake.......................................................................................... 75
Power windows....................................................................................... 76
Mirrors..................................................................................................... 77
Power moonroof (option)........................................................................ 80
Personal settings..................................................................................... 82
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (option)....................................... 85
02
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument overview
02
50
G019492
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument overview
02
``
51
Steering wheel adjustment
Hood opener
Controls in front doors (see
page 52)
Left steering wheel lever
Lighting panel, fuel filler door
opener
Door open handle and locking but-
ton
Climate system air vent
Side window air vent
Cruise control
Horn, airbag
Main instrument panel
Audio controls (option)
Right steering wheel lever
Ignition switch
Moonroof control (option)
Not in use
Not is use
Courtesy lighting switch
Driver's side reading light
Passenger's side reading light
Seat belt reminder and Occupant
Weight Sensor indicator
Rear-view mirror
Display for climate control, personal
settings, and audio system
Audio system
Controls for personal settings and
audio system
Controls for climate system
Gear selector
Hazard warning flashers
Door open handle, and locking but-
ton
Glove compartment
Parking brake
12-volt socket
Position for optional equipment
Position for optional equipment
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument overview
02
52
Control panel in driver's door
G017449
Power windows
Door mirror button, driver's side
Door mirror adjustment control
Door mirror button, passenger's
side
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel
02
``
53
Instrument panel
8 9 11 12 13 1410
G031465
432
5
67
1
Speedometer
Turn signal, left
Warning symbol – See the following pages
for additional information.
Information display – The display presents
information and warning messages, the
ambient temperature, clock, etc. When the
ambient temperature is between 23 °F and
36 °F (–5 °C and +2 °C), a snowflake sym-
bol is shown in the display. This symbol
serves as a warning for possible slippery
road surfaces. Please note that this symbol
does not indicate a fault with your car. At
low speeds, or when the car is not moving,
the temperature readings may be slightly
higher than the actual ambient tempera-
ture.
Information symbol – See the following
pages for additional information.
Turn signal, right
Tachometer – Shows engine speed in
thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Do not drive continuously with the needle
in the red area of the dial, which indicates
maximum allowable engine rpm range.
Instead, shift to a higher gear or slow the
vehicle down. The engine management
system will automatically prevent exces-
sively high engines speeds. This will be
noticeable as a pronounced unevenness in
engine speed.
Indicator and warning symbols
Fuel gauge, see page 257 for fuel tank vol-
ume. When a warning light in the gauge
comes on, the vehicle should be refueled
as soon as possible. see page 67 for
more information on fuel level and con-
sumption in the "Trip computer” section.
High beam indicator
Function display – This window displays
information on functions such as the
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel
02
54
odometer, trip odometers, optional rain
sensor, and cruise control.
Trip odometer reset button – The trip
odometers are used to measure short dis-
tances. Press the button briefly to switch
between the odometer for the car's total
mileage and the two trip odometers, T1
and T2. A long press (more than 2 seconds)
resets the currently selected trip odometer.
Temperature gauge – The gauge indicates
the temperature of the engine cooling sys-
tem. If the temperature is abnormally high
and the needle enters the red zone, a mes-
sage is shown in the display. Bear in mind
that auxiliary lamps in front of the air intake
reduce the cooling capacity at high outside
temperatures and high engine loads.
Indicator and warning symbols
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
``
55
Function check
The indicator and warning symbols
1
light up
when you turn the ignition key or the optional
keyless drive start control to the driving posi-
tion (position II) before starting. This shows that
the symbols are functioning.
When the engine starts, all sym-
bols go out. If the engine is not
started within 5 seconds, all of the
symbols except the malfunction
indicator light (CHECK ENGINE)
and the oil pressure warning light
will go out. Certain symbols may
not have their functions illustrated, depending
on the car's equipment.
CHECK
ENGINE
The PARK BRAKE symbol will not go out until
the parking brake has been released.
Symbols in the center of the instrument
panel
G026365
Warning symbol
The red warning symbol lights up
to indicate a fault that could affect
the car's drivability.This symbol
illuminates when the vehicle is
traveling at speeds above 5 mph
(7 km/h). A text explaining the nature of the fault
will also be shown in the information display.
The symbol and accompanying text will remain
on until the fault has been corrected. This sym-
bol may also light up in combination with other
indicator or warning symbols.
If the red warning symbol lights up:
1. Stop the car as soon as possible in a suit-
able location.
2. Read the message in the information dis-
play.
3. Follow the instructions provided, or con-
tact a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician. Erase the message by pressing
READ, see page 60.
Information symbol
The yellow information symbol
lights up to alert the driver to a
message in the information dis-
play. This symbol illuminates when
the vehicle is traveling at speeds
below 5 mph (7 km/h).
The message can be erased by pressing the
READ button, see page 60, or will disappear
automatically (the length of time required for
the message to disappear varies, depending
on the function indicated).
When the message "TIME FOR REGULAR
SERVICE
" is displayed, the text can be erased
and the information symbol light can be turned
off by pressing the READ button. The text will
disappear and the symbol light will go out auto-
matically after two minutes.
1
On certain engines, the symbol for low oilpressure is not used. Instead, a text warningis provided in the information display, see page 206.
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
56
This symbol may also light up in combination
with other indicator or warning symbols.
NOTE
The car can still be driven after the informa-
tion symbol has come on. The car can be
driven for 1–2 weeks after service-related
information has been displayed.
02 Instruments and controls
Symbols – instrument panel
02
``
57
Symbols – left side
G026439
1. Malfunction indicator light
As you drive, a computer called
On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII)
monitors your car's engine, trans-
mission, electrical and emission
systems.
The CHECK ENGINE light will light
up if the computer senses a condition that
potentially may need correcting. When this
happens, please have your car checked by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
as soon as possible.
CHECK
ENGINE
A CHECK ENGINE light may have many cau-
ses. Sometimes, you may not notice a change
in your car's behavior. Even so, an uncorrected
condition could hurt fuel economy, emission
controls, and drivability. Extended driving with-
out correcting the cause could even damage
other components in your car.
NOTE
Canadian models are equipped with the
second symbol.
2. Anti-lock Brake system (ABS)
If the warning light comes on, there
is a malfunction of the ABS system
(the standard braking system will
still function).
The vehicle should be driven to a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician for inspec-
tion, see page 149 for additional information.
NOTE
Canadian models are equipped with the
second symbol.
3. Rear fog light
This symbol indicates that the rear
fog light (located in the driver's
side taillight cluster) is on.
4. Stability system DSTC
This indicator symbol flashes when
the DSTC (Dynamic Stability and
Traction control system) is actively
working to stabilize the car, see
page 151 for more detailed infor-
mation.
5. Tire Pressure Monitoring System
This system monitors inflation
pressure in the tires. See page
188 for more information.
6. Fuel level warning light
When this light comes on, the vehi-
cle should be refueled as soon as
possible.
02 Instruments and controls
Symbols – instrument panel
02
58
Symbols – right side
G026438
2. Parking brake applied
This light is on when the parking
brake (hand brake) is applied. The
parking brake lever is situated
between the front seats, see
page 75 for more information.
NOTE
Canadian models are equipped with the
second symbol.
3. SRS system warning light
If this light comes on while the car
is being driven, or remains on for
longer than approximately 10 sec-
onds after the car has been
started, the SRS system's diag-
nostic functions have detected a fault in a seat
belt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag, side
impact airbag, and/or an inflatable curtain.
Have the system(s) inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician as soon as
possible.
4. Oil pressure warning light
1
If the light comes on while driving,
the car, stop the engine immedi-
ately, and check the engine oil
level. If the oil level is normal and
the light stays on after restart, have
the car towed to the nearest trained and quali-
fied Volvo service technician. After hard driv-
ing, the light may come on occasionally when
the engine is idling. This is normal, provided it
goes off when the engine speed is increased.
5. Seat belt reminder
This symbol (and the seat belt
reminder light above the rear view
mirror) will light up if either front
seat occupant has not buckled his/
her seat belt. If the car is not mov-
ing, the symbols will go out after approximately
6 seconds.
6. Generator warning light
If the light comes on while the
engine is running, have the charg-
ing system checked by an author-
ized Volvo workshop.
7. Brake failure warning light
If this light comes on while driving
or braking, stop the car as quickly
as possible in a safe place, open
the hood, and check the brake fluid
level in the reservoir, see
page 205 for the location of the reservoir.
1
On certain engines, this symbol is not used to indicate low oil pressure. Instead, a text warning is provided in the information display, see also page 206.
02 Instruments and controls
Symbols – instrument panel
02
59
NOTE
Canadian models are equipped with the
second symbol.
WARNING
If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the
reservoir or if a
Brake failure – Service
urgent
message is displayed in the infor-
mation display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the
car towed to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician and have the brake sys-
tem inspected.
If the BRAKES and ABS warning lights come
on at the same time, this could indicate a fault
in the brake system.
In this case:
1. Stop the car in a suitable place and switch
off the engine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If both warning lights go off, no further
action is required and the car can be
driven.
4. If both lights remain on after the engine has
been restarted, switch off the engine again
and check the brake fluid level, see
page 205 for the location of the reservoir.
Door open warning
The driver will be alerted if one of the doors, the
hood or the liftgate are open or ajar.
At low speeds
If the car is moving at a speed of
less than approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), the Information symbol in
the instrument panel will light up
and a message will be shown in the
information display indicating which door(s),
etc is not completely closed.
At higher speeds
If the car is moving at a speed
above approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h), the Warning symbol in
the instrument panel will light up
and a message will be shown in the
information display indicating which door(s),
etc is not completely closed.
Hood and liftgate
If the hood and/or liftgate is not
completely closed, the Information
symbol in the instrument panel will
light up and a message will be dis-
played, regardless of the vehicle's
speed.
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
02
60
Messages
G019617
When an indicator or warning light in the instru-
ment panel comes on, a message is also
shown in the information display. To read a
message:
1.
Press the READ button (1).
2.
Pressing READ repeatedly enables you to
scroll to any other messages that may be
stored.
NOTE
If a message is displayed when e.g. you are
using the trip computer, this message must
be read before you can access the trip com-
puter.
Message Meaning
STOP SAFELY
A
Stop the vehicle in a
safe place and switch
off the engine to help
prevent the risk of seri-
ous damage.
HIGH ENGINE
TEMP STOP
SAFELY
Stop the vehicle in a
safe place and switch
off the engine to help
prevent the risk of seri-
ous damage.
SERVICE
URGENT
A
Take your car to a
trained and qualified
Volvo service techni-
cian for inspection
immediately.
SEE MANUAL
A
Refer to your owner's
manual. For additional
information, please
contact your Volvo
retailer.
Message Meaning
SERVICE
REQUIRED
A
Take your car to a
trained and qualified
Volvo service techni-
cian for inspection as
soon as possible (but
preferably before the
next scheduled mainte-
nance service).
BOOK TIME
FOR SERVICE
Book time for service at
an authorized Volvo
workshop.
TIME FOR
REGULAR
MAINTE-
NANCE
This message is affec-
ted by the number of
miles/km driven, by the
number of months, or
by the number of engine
hours since the service
reminder was reset at
the most recent regu-
larly scheduled service.
MAINTE-
NANCE OVER-
DUE
If the vehicle is not serv-
iced according to
schedule, the warranty
may not apply to dam-
aged parts, etc.
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
02
61
Message Meaning
TIME FOR
REGULAR
MAINTE-
NANCE
This message is affec-
ted by the number of
miles/km driven, by the
number of months, or
by the number of engine
hours since the service
reminder was reset at
the most recent regu-
larly scheduled service.
REMINDER
CHECK OIL
LEVEL
Stop as soon as possi-
ble and switch off the
engine, check the oil
level and top up if nec-
essary, see page 206.
A
This is part of the message. Additional information will also
be displayed.
02 Instruments and controls
12-volt sockets
02
62
12-volt socket (front seat)
G026349
12-volt socket, auxiliary equipment
The 12-volt socket can be used to plug in cer-
tain accessories such as cellular telephones,
etc. The maximum current is 10 A. The key
must be in position I (or higher) for the auxiliary
socket to function.
Ashtrays/cigarette lighter
The auxiliary socket can also be used for a cig-
arette lighter
1
, and ashtrays, which can be pur-
chased from your Volvo retailer.
NOTE
The cover should be kept on when the aux-
iliary socket is not in use.
Auxiliary equipment
The buttons to the left of the 12-volt socket can
be used for Volvo-installed optional or auxiliary
equipment.
12-volt socket (rear seat)
G029082
NOTE
The 12-volt socket in the rear seat cannot
function as a cigarette lighter.
1
Accessory.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
``
63
G026415
Pos. Lighting
All lighting off. Low beam head-
lights (daytime running lights)
will automatically come on if the
ignition key is in position II.
Front and rear parking lights
and license plate lights will also
be on. High beams can be
briefly flashed. The headlights
switch off automatically when
the ignition key is removed.
Parking lights
Daytime running lights. High
beams and high beam flash can
be used in this position.
Parking lights
The front and rear parking lights can be turned
on even when the ignition is switched off.
±
Turn switch (1) to the parking light position.
The license plate lights also illuminate when the
parking lights are switched on.
Headlights
1.
Turn the ignition key to position II.
2. The low beam headlights (daytime running
lights) illuminate automatically, except
when the light switch (1) is in the parking
light position
1
.
NOTE
See page 65 for information on switching
between high and low beams.
Brake lights
The brake lights come on automatically when
the brakes are applied.
Fog lights
Front fog lights (option)
The front fog lights can be used in combination
with either the headlights or the parking lights.
1.
Turn the ignition key to position II.
2. Press button (3) to turn on the front fog
lights.
An indicator light in the button illuminates when
the front fog lights are on.
1
On Canadian models, the daytime running lights will remain on with the light switch in this position.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
64
Rear fog light
The single rear fog light is located in the driver's
side taillight cluster.
The rear fog light will only function in combi-
nation with the high/low beam headlights or the
optional front fog lights.
1.
Turn the ignition key to position II.
2. Press button (5) to turn on the rear fog light.
An indicator light in the button illuminates when
the rear fog light is on.
NOTE
The rear fog light is considerably brighter
than the normal taillights and should be
used only when conditions such as fog, rain,
snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility for
other vehicles to less than 500 ft.
(150 meters).
Instrument panel lighting
The instrument panel lighting illuminates when
the ignition is in position II and the light switch
(1) is in either position
or .
NOTE
To make it easier to read the odometer, trip
odometer, clock, and ambient temperature,
these gauges illuminate when the vehicle is
unlocked and when the key has been
removed from the ignition switch. The light-
ing will go out when the vehicle is locked.
Move the thumb wheel (2) up to increase
brightness or down to decrease brightness.
Unlocking the fuel filler door
With the ignition switched off, press button (4)
to unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that
the fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the
car begins to move forward.
An audible click will be heard when the fuel filler
door re-locks.
02 Instruments and controls
Left-side steering wheel lever
02
``
65
Lever positions
G026954
Turn signals, lane change position
Turn signals, position for normal turns
High beam flash
Toggle between high and low beams,
Home Safe lighting
Turn signals
When turning
±
Move the lever as far up or down as pos-
sible (to position 2) to start the turn signals.
The turn signals will be cancelled automatically
by the movement of the steering wheel, or the
lever can be returned to its initial position by
hand.
When changing lanes
The driver can automatically flash the turn sig-
nals 3 times by:
•
Moving the turn signal lever up or down to
position 1 and releasing it.
•
Moving the lever up or down to position 2
and immediately back to its original posi-
tion.
NOTE
•
This automatic flashing sequence can
be interrupted by immediately moving
the lever in the opposite direction.
•
If the turn signal indicator flashes faster
than normal, check for a burned-out
turn signal bulb.
High/low beam headlights
Continuous high beams
1.
Turn the ignition key to position II.
2.
With the light switch (1) in position ,
see page 63, pull the turn signal lever
toward the steering wheel (position 4) to
toggle between high and low beams.
High beam flash
1.
Turn the ignition key to position II.
2. Pull the turn signal lever to position 3. The
high beams will remain on until the lever is
released.
Home safe lighting
When you leave your car at night, you can
make use of the home safe lighting function to
illuminate the area in front of the car.
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
2. Pull the direction indicator lever as far as
possible towards the steering wheel (to
position 4) and release it.
3. Exit the car and lock the doors.
The headlights and parking lights will illuminate
and remain on for 30
1
, 60 or 90 seconds. The
time interval can be changed according to your
1
Factory setting
02 Instruments and controls
Left-side steering wheel lever
02
66
preferences by using the Personal Settings
function, see page 82 for more information.
02 Instruments and controls
Trip computer
02
``
67
G029052
READ (press to acknowledge/confirm/
erase a message)
Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the trip
computer menus)
RESET
The trip computer stores information gathered
from several systems in your car and has four
menus (five on Canadian models) that can be
shown in the information display.
•
MILES TO EMPTY TANK
•
AVERAGE (average fuel consumption)
•
INSTANTANEOUS (current fuel con-
sumption)
•
AVERAGE SPEED
•
ACTUAL SPEED (current speed in mph,
Canadian models only)
•
DSTC, see page 151
NOTE
Warning messages from the car's monitor-
ing systems will override the trip computer
function.
If a warning message is shown in the informa-
tion display while you are using the trip com-
puter:
1. Acknowledge the message by pressing the
READ (button 1).
2.
Press READ again to return to the trip
computer function.
Controls
The trip computer functions can be accessed
by twisting the thumb wheel (2) one step at a
time in either direction. Twisting a final time
returns you to the original function.
Resetting
AVERAGE (average fuel consumption) and
AVERAGE SPEED can be reset.
1. Select one of these functions.
2.
Press RESET (3).
MILES TO EMPTY TANK
This function shows the approximate distance
that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the
tank. The calculation is based on average fuel
consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km)
of driving and the amount of fuel remaining in
the tank when the reading was taken.
When the message
---- miles to empty tank
appears in the display, refuel as soon as pos-
sible.
AVERAGE
This value indicates fuel consumption since the
last time the trip computer was reset, by press-
ing RESET (button 3). When the engine is
switched off, information on fuel consumption
is stored and remains in system memory until
RESET (button 3) is pressed again.
INSTANTANEOUS
This value indicates the current fuel consump-
tion, based on readings taken once per sec-
ond. When the car is not moving, "----" will be
displayed.
AVERAGE SPEED
This value indicates average speed since the
last time the trip computer was reset, by press-
ing RESET (button 3). When the engine is
switched off, information on average speed is
stored and remains in system memory until the
RESET (button 3) is pressed again.
02 Instruments and controls
Trip computer
02
68
ACTUAL SPEED (Canadian models only)
This function provides the driver with an instan-
taneous conversion of the car's current speed
from km/h to mph.
NOTE
Trip computer readings may vary slightly
depending on the circumference of the tires
on the car, tire inflation, or driving style.
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control (option)
02
``
69
Engaging the cruise control function
G020141
The cruise control buttons are located on the
left side of the steering wheel hub.
NOTE
This does not set the vehicle's speed.
1.
Press the CRUISE button.
CRUISE will
appear in the function display in the center
of the instrument panel.
2.
Press + or – to set the current speed.
CRUISE ON will be displayed.
Increasing or decreasing speed
G031667
Use + or – in the following ways to increase or
decrease the vehicle's speed:
1.
Press and hold down + or – until the vehicle
reaches the desired speed. This will
become the set speed when the button is
released.
2.
Press + or – for approximately a half sec-
ond and release the button to increase or
decrease vehicle speed by approximately
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
NOTE
•
Cruise control will not function at
speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h).
•
Momentary acceleration, for less than
1 minute (e.g. when passing another
car), does not affect cruise control oper-
ation. The car will automatically return
to the previously set speed when the
accelerator pedal is released.
Temporarily disengaging the cruise
control
•
Press 0 to temporarily disengage cruise
control.
CRUISE will appear in the function display.
The currently set speed is stored in the sys-
tem's memory.
Cruise control is also automatically
disengaged:
•
If the speed drops below approximately
20 mph (30 km/h) when driving uphill.
•
When the brake or clutch pedal is
depressed.
•
If the gear selector is moved to posi-
tion N.
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control (option)
02
70
•
During wheel spin or wheel lock-up.
•
If the vehicle's speed is increased by using
the accelerator pedal for more than 1
minute.
Returning to the set speed
Press the button to resume the
previously set speed.
CRUISE
ON
will be displayed.
Disengaging cruise control
Cruise control can also be disengaged by:
•
Pressing the CRUISE button (CRUISE
ON
will no longer be shown in the function
display).
•
Putting the gear selector in Neutral (N).
WARNING
Cruise control should not be used in heavy
traffic or when driving on wet or slippery
roads. Cruise control may not maintain set
speed on steep downgrades.
02 Instruments and controls
Right-side steering wheel lever
02
``
71
Windshield wipers
0
0
A
C
D
B
G025411
Windshield/headlight washers
Rain sensor (option) – on/of, see page 71
Thumb wheel
Liftgate wiper/washer
Windshield wipers off
The windshield wipers are off when
the lever is in position 0.
Manual wiper function
From position 0, move the lever
upward. The windshield wipers will
sweep one stroke at a time for as
long as the lever is held up.
Intermittent wiper function
With the lever in this position, you
can set the wiper interval by mov-
ing the thumb wheel (C) upward to
increase wiper speed or down-
ward to decrease the speed.
Continuous wiper function
The wipers operate at "normal"
speed.
High speed wiper function.
A–Windshield washers
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel and
release it. The wipers will make 2–3 sweeps
across the windshield after the lever has been
released.
CAUTION
•
Use ample washer fluid when washing
the windshield. The windshield should
be thoroughly wet when the wipers are
in operation.
•
Before using the wipers, ice and snow
should be removed from the wind-
shield/rear window. Be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen in place.
Headlight washers (certain models)
When the lever has been pulled, high pressure
jets mounted in the bumper will spray the head-
lights.
The following applies to conserve washer fluid,
see page 63 for information on the light switch
positions:
Low/high beam headlights on
The headlights will be washed the first time the
windshield is washed. Thereafter, the head-
lights will only be washed once for every five
times the windshield is washed within a 10-
minute period.
Parking lights on
Optional Bi-Xenon
headlights will be washed
once for every five times the windshield is
washed.
Normal halogen headlights will not be washed.
02 Instruments and controls
Right-side steering wheel lever
02
72
B – Rain sensor (option)
G026422
The rain sensor regulates windshield wiper
speed according to the amount of water on the
windshield. The sensitivity of the rain sensor is
adjusted by moving the thumb wheel (C in the
illustration on the previous page) up (the wipers
will sweep the windshield more frequently) or
down (the wipers will sweep the windshield
less frequently).
On/Off
Activating the rain sensor
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Put the windshield wiper lever in position
0.
3. Press button B (see page 71). The rain sen-
sor symbol will appear in the lower display.
Manual deactivation
The rain sensor can be deactivated by:
•
Pressing button (B).
or
•
Moving the windshield wiper lever down.
NOTE
The rain sensor function will remain acti-
vated if the lever is briefly moved up to
activate the "manual sweep" function.
CAUTION
The rain sensor should be deactivated when
washing the car in an automatic car wash,
etc. If the rain sensor function is left on, the
wipers will start inadvertently in the car
wash and could be damaged.
Automatic deactivation
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in
the following situations:
•
When the key is removed from the ignition.
•
Five minutes after the ignition is switched
off if the key is left in the ignition.
C – Thumb wheel
The thumb wheel is used to set the wiper inter-
val when intermittent wiping is selected, or the
sensitivity to the amount of rain on the wind-
shield when the rain sensor is selected. Move
the wheel upward or downward to increase/
decrease wiper speed when the intermittent
function is selected, or to increase/decrease
the optional rain sensor's sensitivity when the
this function is activated.
D – Liftgate wiper/washer
Press the lever forward to wipe and wash the
liftgate window. The wiper will sweep the win-
dow several times after the lever has been
released.
The button at the end of the lever has three
positions:
•
Intermittent wiping: Press in the upper sec-
tion of the button.
•
Normal wiper speed: Press in the lower
section of the button.
•
Neutral position: The wiper function is
switched off.
02 Instruments and controls
Right-side steering wheel lever
02
73
Liftgate wiper and reverse gear
•
If the front wipers are on and the transmis-
sion is put into reverse gear, the liftgate
wiper will be activated.
•
If the transmission is in reverse and the
manual windshield wiper function is used
(the lever is pushed upward), the liftgate
wiper will also be activated for as long the
lever is held up.
•
If the liftgate wiper is already in normal wip-
ing function, the normal wiping function will
continue.
02 Instruments and controls
Steering wheel adjustment, Hazard warning flashers
02
74
Steering wheel adjustment
G020143
Both the height and the reach of the steering
wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable posi-
tion for the driver.
1. Pull down the lever on the steering column
to release the steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to a suitable
position
3. Press the lever back into place to lock the
steering wheel in the new position. If nec-
essary, press the steering wheel slightly
while pressing the lever into the locked
position.
Check that the steering wheel is locked in the
new position.
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel while driv-
ing.
Hazard warning flashers
G020144
The four-way flasher should be used to indi-
cate that the vehicle has become a traffic haz-
ard. To activate the flashers, press the triangu-
lar button in the center dash. Press the button
again to turn off the flashers.
NOTE
•
Regulations regarding the use of the
hazard warning flasher may vary,
depending on where you live.
•
The hazard warning flashers will be acti-
vated automatically if an airbag
deploys.
02 Instruments and controls
Parking brake
02
75
Parking brake (hand brake)
G026348
The parking brake lever is located between the
front seats.
NOTE
The indicator light will illuminate even if the
parking brake has only been partially
applied.
When applying the parking brake
1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
2. Pull the parking brake lever up firmly to its
full extent.
3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that
the vehicle is at a standstill.
4. If the vehicle rolls, the parking brake lever
must be pulled more firmly.
5. When parking a vehicle always put the gear
selector in first gear (for manual transmis-
sion) or P (for automatic transmission).
Parking on a hill
•
If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front
wheels so that they point away from the
curb.
•
If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the
front wheels so that they point toward the
curb.
Releasing the parking brake
1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
2. Pull the lever up slightly, press the button
at the end of the lever and lower the lever
completely.
WARNING
Pull up the parking brake lever up firmly to
its full extent.
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
02
76
Operation
G018240
Control panel in driver's door
Power window controls
The power windows are controlled by buttons
in the arm rests.
•
The ignition must be ON (ignition key in
position I, II or the engine running) for the
power windows to function.
•
The power windows will also function after
the ignition has been switched off as long
as neither of the front doors has been
opened.
Opening a window
Lightly press down the front edge of either of
the buttons (A) to the first detent ("stop") to
open a window to the position of your choice.
WARNING
•
Always remove the ignition key when
the vehicle is unattended.
•
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
•
Make sure that the windows are com-
pletely unobstructed before they are
operated.
•
Press the front part of any of the buttons
(A) as far down as possible and release to
automatically open the window com-
pletely.
•
To stop the window at any time, pull the
button up.
Closing a window
•
Lightly pull up the front edge of any of the
buttons (A) to the first detent ("stop") to
close a window to the position of your
choice.
•
Pull the front part of any of the buttons (A)
up as far as possible and release to auto-
matically close the window completely. To
stop the window at any time, press the but-
ton down.
Power window control – front
passenger's side
G019511
The control for the power window in the front
passenger's door operates that window only.
02 Instruments and controls
Mirrors
02
``
77
Rearview mirror
G020146
Day/night control
Normal position
Night position, reduces glare from follow-
ing traffic
Night position
To reduce glare from the headlights of follow-
ing vehicles, use control (1) to switch between
the normal and night-driving positions.
Auto-dim function (option)
An optional integrated sensor reacts to head-
lights from following traffic and automatically
reduces glare.
Rearview mirror with compass (option)
G029930
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction toward which the car is
pointing. Eight different directions can be dis-
played: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW. The
display shows your car's orientation with
respect to true north.
Calibrating the compass
G031045
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass is initially set for the zone to
which the car was delivered, and should
always be adjusted if the car is driven to a new
magnetic zone. A "C" will be displayed if cali-
bration becomes necessary.
To calibrate the compass:
1. Stop the car in a large, open area, away
from traffic.
2. Using a pen or similar object, hold the but-
ton (1) depressed for at least 6 seconds.
"C" will be displayed.
02 Instruments and controls
Mirrors
02
78
G026409
Magnetic zones
3. Press button (1) for at least 3 seconds to
display the number of the current magnetic
zone.
4. Press button (1) repeatedly until the num-
ber for the required geographical area
(
1 – 15) is displayed. "C" will be displayed
again.
5. Drive slowly in a circle at a maximum speed
of 6 mph (10 km/h) until a compass direc-
tion is displayed.
Calibration is complete.
Power door mirrors
G018250
The mirror control switches are located on the
driver's door armrest.
Adjusting the mirrors
WARNING
•
The mirrors should always be adjusted
prior to driving.
•
Objects seen in the passenger's side
wide-angle door mirror are closer than
they appear to be.
Driver's door mirror:
±
Press the L button (a light in the switch will
go on) to activate the adjustment control.
Use this control to adjust the driver's door
mirror.
Passenger's door mirror:
1.
Press the R switch (a light in the switch will
go on) to activate the adjustment control.
Use this control to adjust the passenger's
door mirror.
2. After you have adjusted the mirror(s), press
the L or R switch again (the LED will go out)
to deactivate the adjustment control.
Storing the mirrors' position
The position of the door mirrors is stored when
the vehicle is locked. The next time the driver's
door is unlocked with the same remote control
and that door is opened within 2 minutes, the
optional power driver's seat and side door mir-
rors will automatically move to the position that
they were in when the doors were most
recently locked with the same remote control.
Folding power door mirrors (option on
certain markets only)
The mirrors can be folded in for parking/driving
in narrow spaces.
02 Instruments and controls
Mirrors
02
79
Folding the mirrors in
1.
Press down the L and R mirror control but-
tons on the driver's door at the same time.
2. Release them after approximately one sec-
ond. The mirrors automatically fold in to the
fully retracted position.
Folding the mirrors out
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors
automatically fold out to the fully extended
position.
Automatic folding
When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the
remote control or with the optional keyless
drive system (see page 123), the power door
mirrors with automatically fold in or out.
NOTE
The door mirrors will not fold out automati-
cally when the vehicle is unlocked if they
were folded in using the buttons on the driv-
er's door control panel.
This function can be activated/deactivated in
Personal settings (see page 82). In the menu
system, go to Car settings
Fold mirr. when
locking.
Return to "neutral" position
If a mirror has been inadvertently moved (bum-
ped in a parking lot, etc.) from its original (neu-
tral) position, it must be moved back to this
position before automatic folding will function
again.
To so so:
1.
Fold in the mirrors by pressing the L and
R mirror control buttons on the driver's
door at the same time.
2.
Fold them out again by pressing the L and
R mirror control buttons.
This returns the mirrors to their original (neutral)
positions.
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) -
option
The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an
information system that indicates the presence
of another vehicle in the side-view mirror's
"blind area." See page 157 for detailed infor-
mation.
02 Instruments and controls
Power moonroof (option)
02
80
Operating the moonroof
G007503
To operate the moonroof, the ignition key must
first be turned to the intermediate or drive posi-
tion (position I, II or the engine running). The
moonroof can be opened in two ways:
Tilt position
Sliding moonroof
G029222
Moonroof control in the ceiling console
Auto open
Manual open
Manual close
Auto close
Tilt open
Tilt close
Tilt position
Open: Press the rear edge of the control
upward to position 5.
Close: Pull the rear edge of the control down to
position 6.
Sliding moonroof
Auto open/close
Open: Pull the switch as far back as possible
(to position 1) and release it to automatically
slide open the moonroof.
Close: Push the switch as far forward as pos-
sible (to position 4) and release it to automati-
cally close the moonroof.
Manual open/close
Open: Pull the switch back to the first stop
(position 2) and hold it until the moonroof has
opened to the position of your choice.
Close: Push the switch forward to the first stop
(position 3) and hold it until the moonroof has
closed to the position of your choice, or has
closed completely.
NOTE
If the moonroof is repeatedly obstructed
during auto-close operation, an overload
circuit breaker will temporarily halt moon-
roof function. The moonroof will return to
normal function after a brief cool-down
period.
02 Instruments and controls
Power moonroof (option)
02
81
CAUTION
•
Remove ice and snow before opening
the moonroof.
•
Do not operate the moonroof if it is fro-
zen closed.
•
Never place heavy objects on the
moonroof.
WARNING
•
If the moonroof is obstructed during
auto-close operation, it will automati-
cally reverse direction and return to its
starting position.
•
During manual closing, if the moonroof
is obstructed, immediately open it
again.
WARNING
•
Never open or close the moonroof if it is
obstructed in any way.
•
Never allow a child to operate the
moonroof.
•
Never extend any object or body part
though the open moonroof, even if the
vehicle's ignition is completely
switched off.
•
Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.
Visor
G020157
The optional moonroof features a sliding visor.
The visor slides open automatically when the
moonroof is opened, and must be closed man-
ually.
02 Instruments and controls
Personal settings
02
82
Control panel
A
D
B
C
E
G026307
Display
Menu button
Exit button
Enter button
Menu navigation controls
Personal settings can be made for some of the
car's functions, such as the central locking
system, climate control, and the audio system.
Please refer to page 231 for more information
on the audio functions that can be adjusted.
The settings are presented in the display (A).
To access the menu and adjust settings
1.
Press MENU (B).
2.
Scroll to Car Settings using the menu nav-
igation control (E).
3.
Press ENTER (D).
4. Select an alternative using the menu navi-
gation control (E).
5. Confirm your selection by pressing
ENTER.
To exit the menu
Press EXIT (C).
Available settings
Clock adjust
To set the time:
1. Use the number keys or the up/down arrow
keys on the navigation control (E) to
change the hour or minute.
2. Select hour(s) or minute(s) to be changed
with the left/right arrow keys.
3.
Press ENTER to start the clock.
NOTE
If you are currently using the 12-hour time
setting, use the up/down arrow keys to
select AM/PM after the minute-setting has
been adjusted.
Lock confirmation light
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control, the direction indicators can be
selected to flash to confirm the action. The
alternatives On/Off are available for both lock-
ing and unlocking.
Autolock
When the car starts to move, the doors and
liftgate can be locked automatically. The alter-
natives On/Off are available.
NOTE
Pulling the handle twice on a door unlocks
and opens that door.
Unlock
There are two alternatives for unlocking:
02 Instruments and controls
Personal settings
02
``
83
•
Global (All doors) – unlocks all doors and
the liftgate with one press on the remote
control.
•
Two Step (Two-stage unlocking) – This
alternative unlocks the driver's door with
one press on the remote control. A second
press unlocks the passenger's door and
the liftgate.
Automatically folding the door mirrors
The setting makes it possible to automatically
fold the door mirrors in or out when the vehicle
is locked or unlocked. See page 78.
Operating side windows
The following alternative can be selected for
opening the door windows at the same time by
pressing and holding the Unlock switch in
either of the front doors (see page 127 for
additional information)
1
NOTE
The ignition key must be in position I or
higher (see page 141) before the door win-
dows can be opened using the switches in
the doors.
•
Auto open all windows On/Off
Temporarily turning off the alarm
sensor(s)
The alarm sensors can be temporarily turned
off (if, for example, a person or a pet remains
in the vehicle when the doors are locked from
outside with the remote control). There are two
alternatives:
Activate once and Ask on exit,
see page 118 and 129 .
Approach lighting
This alternative determines the length of time
for which the car's lights will remain on when
the Approach light button on the central lock-
ing system's remote control is pressed. Inter-
vals of 30/60/90 seconds may be selected, see
teh section "Remote control functions" for
more information.
Home safe lighting
This alternative determines the length of time
for which the car's lights will remain on when
the high beam lever on the steering column is
pulled toward the wheel with the ignition
switched off. Intervals of 30/60/90 seconds
may be selected, see page 65 for information
on using this function.
Information
•
VIN number – The VIN (Vehicle Identifica-
tion Number) is the car's unique identity
number.
•
Number of Keys – the number of keys reg-
istered for the car is displayed here.
Climate functions
•
Blower speed in AUTO mode – the blower
speed can be set to AUTO mode in models
equipped with ECC. Choose between
"Low", "Normal" and "High".
•
Timer for recirculation – when the timer is
active, the air recirculates in the car for 3–
12 minutes depending on the ambient tem-
perature. Select On/Off depending on
whether the recirculation timer is to be
active or not.
Keyless locking and unlocking (option as
available)
The following alternatives can be selected for
locking and unlocking the doors and liftgate:
•
All doors – all doors are locked or unlocked
at the same time.
•
Doors on the same side – front and rear
doors on the same side are unlocked
together.
1
This menu alternative also makes it possible to open both door windows by pressing and holding the Unlock button on the remote control for several seconds.
02 Instruments and controls
Personal settings
02
84
•
Both front doors – both front doors are
unlocked together.
•
One front door – either of the front doors
can be unlocked separately
2
.
Reset to factory settings
Use this alternative to return to the default cli-
mate system settings.
2
Factory default.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (option)
02
``
85
Introduction
G030070
The HomeLink Wireless Control System pro-
vides a convenient way to replace up to three
hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters
used to activate devices such as gate opera-
tors, garage door openers, entry door locks,
security systems, even home lighting. Addi-
tional HomeLink information can be found on
the Internet at www.homelink.com.
WARNING
•
If you use HomeLink to open a garage
door or gate, be sure no one is near the
gate or door while it is in motion.
•
When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park outside of
the garage.
•
Do not use HomeLink with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and
reverse features as required by U.S.
federal safety standards (this includes
any garage door opener model manu-
factured before April 1, 1982). A garage
door that cannot detect an object - sig-
naling the door to stop and reverse -
does not meet current U.S. federal
safety standards. For more information,
contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com.
Retain the original transmitter of the RF device
you are programming for use in other vehicles
as well as for future HomeLink programming. It
is also suggested that upon the sale of the
vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be
erased for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing
HomeLink Buttons”.
Programming HomeLink
NOTE
Some vehicles may require the ignition
switch to be turned on or to the second
(“accessories”) position for programming
and/or operation of HomeLink. It is also rec-
ommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device
being programmed to HomeLink for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
1. Position the end of your hand-held trans-
mitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from the
HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the indicator light in view.
2. Simultaneously press and hold both the
chosen HomeLink and hand-held transmit-
ter buttons until the HomeLink indicator
light changes from a slow to a rapidly blink-
ing light. Now you may release both the
HomeLink and hand-held transmitter but-
tons.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (option)
02
86
NOTE
Some devices may require you to replace
this Programming Step 2 with procedures
noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Pro-
gramming” section. If the HomeLink indica-
tor light does not change to a rapidly
blinking light after performing these steps,
contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com.
3.
Firmly press, hold for five seconds and
release the programmed HomeLink but-
ton up to two separate times to activate the
door. If the door does not activate, press
and hold the just-trained HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
•
If the indicator light stays on con-
stantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the HomeLink button is pressed and
released.
•
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns to a con-
stant light continue with “Program-
ming” steps 4-6 to complete the pro-
gramming of a rolling code equipped
device (most commonly a garage door
opener).
4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-
head unit) in the garage, locate the “learn”
or “smart” button. This can usually be
found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or
“smart” button. (The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.) There
are 30 seconds to initiate step 6.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold
for two seconds and release the pro-
grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the
“press/hold/release” sequence a second
time, and, depending on the brand of the
garage door opener (or other rolling code
equipped device), repeat this sequence a
third time to complete the programming
process.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling
code equipped device.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans-
mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev-
eral seconds of transmission – which may not
be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficul-
ties programming a gate operator or garage
door opener by using the “Programming” pro-
cedures, replace “Programming HomeLink”
step 2 with the following:
•
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink
button while you press and release -
every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-
held transmitter until the HomeLink indica-
tor light changes from a slow to a rapidly
blinking light. Now you may release both
the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter
buttons.
Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com-
plete.
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the pro-
grammed HomeLink button. Activation will
now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage
door opener, gate operator, security system,
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For
convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time. In the
event that there are still programming difficul-
ties or questions, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (option)
02
87
Erasing HomeLink Buttons
To erase programming from the three Home-
Link buttons (individual buttons cannot be
erased but can be “reprogrammed” as outlined
below), follow the step noted:
•
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink
buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash-after 10 seconds. Release both but-
tons. Do not hold for longer that 20 sec-
onds. HomeLink is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed at
any time beginning with “Programming” -
step 1.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink
Button
To program a device to HomeLink using a
HomeLink button previously trained, follow
these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink but-
ton. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the Home-
Link button, proceed with “Programming”
- step 1.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink
at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
This device complies with FCC rules part 15
and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) This device must accept any
interference that may be received including
interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE
The transmitter has been tested and com-
plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
1
HomeLink and the HomeLink house are regis-
tered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.
1
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
G020906
88
General information................................................................................. 90
Air vents.................................................................................................. 92
Manual climate control............................................................................ 93
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) – option.............................................. 96
Air distribution......................................................................................... 99
03
CLIMATE
03 Climate
General information
03
90
Air conditioning – A/C
Your car is equipped with a climate control
system that includes either manually adjusta-
ble air conditioning or optional Electronic Cli-
mate Control (ECC).
The air conditioning system can be switched
off, but for optimal air quality in the passenger
compartment and to prevent the windows from
fogging, the air conditioning should be left on
– even in cool weather.
NOTE
In warm weather, a small amount of water
may accumulate under the car when it has
been parked. This water is condensation
from the A/C system and is normal.
Ice and snow
Always keep the air intake grille at the base of
the windshield free of snow.
Fog on the inside of the windows
The defroster function should be used to
remove fog or mist from the inside of the win-
dows. Keeping the windows clean with a com-
mercially available window washing spray will
also help prevent fogging or misting
Climate control maintenance
Special tools and equipment are required to
maintain and carry out repairs on the climate
system. Work of this type should only be done
by a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-
nician.
Refrigerant
Volvo cares about the environment. The air
conditioning system in your car contains a
CFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substance
will not deplete the ozone layer. The system
contains 1.2 lbs (530 g) R134a (HFC 134a), and
uses PAG oil.
Passenger compartment filter
Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at
the recommended intervals. Please refer to
your Warranty and Service Records Informa-
tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for these intervals.
The filter should be replaced more often when
driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The
filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should
always be replaced with a new one.
NOTE
There are different types of cabin air filters.
Ensure that the correct type is installed.
Display
The display above the climate control panel
shows the climate settings that have been
made.
Personal settings
There are two functions in the climate system
that can be set to your preferences:
•
Blower speed to Auto mode (models with
ECC only).
•
Timer controlled recirculation of the air in
the passenger compartment.
03 Climate
General information
03
91
For information about how to make these set-
tings, see the Personal settings section on
page 82.
Models equipped with ECC (option)
Sensors
•
The sunlight sensor is on the upper side of
the dashboard
•
The passenger compartment temperature
sensor is located behind the climate sys-
tem control panel.
•
The ambient temperature sensor is in the
driver's side door mirror.
•
The humidity sensor is in the rearview mir-
ror.
These sensors should never be obstructed.
NOTE
The sunlight sensor monitors the side of the
vehicle from which the sun shines into the
passenger compartment. This means that
the temperature may differ slightly between
the left and right air vents, even if the climate
system temperature is set to be the same
for both sides of the passenger compart-
ment.
Side windows and optional moonroof
The electronic climate control system will func-
tion best if the windows and moonroof are
closed. If you drive with the windows or moon-
roof open, it may be preferable to manually
adjust the temperature and blower control (the
LED in the AUTO switch should be off).
Acceleration
The air conditioning system is temporarily
switched off during full throttle acceleration.
03 Climate
Air vents
03
92
Air vents in the dashboard
G019942
Open
Closed
Horizontal air flow
Vertical air flow
Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-
dows to defrost.
03 Climate
Manual climate control
03
``
93
G019515
Climate system control panel
Blower speed
Recirculation
Defroster
Airflow controls
A/C – ON/OFF
Heated driver's seat
Heated front passenger's seat
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
Temperature selector
Manual climate system functions
1. Blower
The blower speed can be
increased or decreased by
turning the knob. If the knob is
turned counterclockwise and
the indicator light in the dis-
play goes out, the blower and
the air conditioning are
switched off. The display shows the blower
symbol and OFF.
2. Recirculation
This function can be used to
shut out exhaust fumes,
smoke, etc from the passen-
ger compartment. The air in
the passenger compartment
is then recirculated, i.e. no air
from outside the car is taken
into the car when this function is activated.
Recirculation (together with the air condition-
ing system) cools the passenger compartment
more quickly in very warm weather. If the air in
the car recirculates for too long, there is a risk
of condensation forming on the insides of the
windows, especially in winter.
03 Climate
Manual climate control
03
94
Timer
The timer function minimizes the risk of mist-
ing, or stale air when the recirculation function
is selected, see page 82 for information on set-
ting the recirculation timer. Recirculation is
always disengaged when you select Defroster
(3).
3. Defroster
Directs airflow to the wind-
shield and side windows and
increases blower speed.
When the defroster is activated:
•
Air flows to the windows at high blower
speed.
•
The LED in the defroster button lights up
when this function is activated. The air con-
ditioning system is controlled to provide
maximum air dehumidification.
•
The air conditioning is automatically
switched on (can be switched off by press-
ing button 5).
4. Airflow controls
Press one of the three buttons
in the illustration to activate
the selected airflow. A symbol
in the display above the cli-
mate control panel and a lit
LED in the selected button
indicate that the manual func-
tion has been selected. With manually selected
airflow both warm and cool air can be selected.
The desired temperature is selected using con-
trol 9.
5. A/C – On or Off
ON: The air conditioning sys-
tem is engaged when the ON
light is lit.
OFF: The system is disen-
gaged when the OFF lights
up.
If Defroster (3) is activated the air conditioning
is always engaged.
6/7. Heated front seats (option)
Maximum heating: Press the
button once – both LEDs light
up.
Reduced heating: Press the button a second
time – one LED lights up.
Seat heating off: Press the button a third time
– no LEDs are lit.
8. Heated rear window and door mirrors
Press to defrost the rear win-
dow and door mirrors.
The rear window and door
mirrors are defrosted simulta-
neously if the switch is
pressed once. The defrost
function is active if the LED in the switch is illu-
minated.
•
The function can be switched off manually
by pressing the button,
•
The defrost function switches off automat-
ically after 12–20 minutes, depending on
the outside temperature.
NOTE
On certain markets, the defrost function
may remain on longer than 20 minutes in
cold weather to help keep the rear window
free from ice or condensation.
03 Climate
Manual climate control
03
95
9. Temperature selector
The knob with the thermome-
ter symbol is used to select
cooling or heating for both the
driver's and passenger's
sides of the car.
03 Climate
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) – option
03
96
G019518
Auto – On/Off
Blower speed
Recirculation
Defroster
Airflow controls
A/C – ON/OFF
Heated driver's seat
Heated front passenger's seat
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
Temperature selector
ECC functions
1. Auto – On/Off
The AUTO function automat-
ically regulates climate con-
trol to maintain the desired
temperature. The automatic
function controls heating, air
conditioning, blower speed,
recirculation, and air distribu-
tion.
If you select one or more manual functions, the
remaining functions continue to be controlled
automatically. All manual settings are switched
off when AUTO is switched on. AUTO
CLIMATE
is shown in the display.
2. Blower speed
The blower speed can be
increased or decreased by
turning the knob. The blower
speed is regulated automati-
cally if AUTO is selected. The
previously set blower speed is
disconnected.
NOTE
If the knob is turned counterclockwise and
the blower indication in the display goes
out, the blower and the air conditioning are
switched off. The display shows the blower
symbol and
OFF.
03 Climate
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) – option
03
``
97
3. Recirculation
This function can be used to
shut out exhaust fumes,
smoke, etc from the passen-
ger compartment. The air in
the passenger compartment
is then recirculated, i.e. no air
from outside the car is taken
into the car when this function is activated.
If the air in the car recirculates for too long,
there is a risk of condensation forming on the
insides of the windows, especially in winter.
Timer
The timer function minimizes the risk of fogging
or stale air when the recirculation function is
selected, see page 82 for information on set-
ting the recirculation timer.
NOTE
Recirculation is always disengaged if the
defroster button is engaged to clear ice or
condensation from the side windows.
4. Defroster
Directs airflow to the wind-
shield and side windows and
increases blower speed.
When the defroster is acti-
vated:
•
Air flows to the windows at high blower
speed.
•
The LED in the defroster button lights up
when this function is activated. The air con-
ditioning system is controlled to provide
maximum air dehumidification.
•
The air conditioning is automatically
switched on (can be switched off by press-
ing button 6).
The air is not recirculated.
5. Airflow controls
Press one of the three buttons
in the illustration to activate
the selected airflow. A symbol
in the display above the cli-
mate control panel and a lit
LED in the selected button
indicate that the manual func-
tion has been selected. With manually selected
airflow both warm and cool air can be selected.
See also the table on page 97.
6. Air conditioning On/Off
ON: The air conditioning sys-
tem is engaged when the ON
light is lit and is controlled
automatically by the system
to maintain the selected tem-
perature.
OFF: The system is disengaged when the
OFF lights up
When OFF is selected and the OFF LED is lit,
the air conditioning system is deactivated.
Other functions are still controlled automati-
cally.
When Defroster (4) is selected, the air condi-
tioning system is activated for maximum dehu-
midifying.
7 and 8. Heated front seats (option)
Maximum heating: Press the
button once – both LEDs light
up.
Reduced heating: Press the
button a second time – one
LED lights up.
Seat heating off: Press the button a third time
– no LEDs are lit.
03 Climate
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) – option
03
98
9. Rear window and door mirror
defrosters
Press to defrost the rear win-
dow and door mirrors.
The rear window and door
mirrors are defrosted simulta-
neously if the switch is
pressed once. The defrost
function is active if the LED in the switch is illu-
minated.
•
The function can be switched off manually
by pressing the button.
•
The defrost function switches off automat-
ically after 12–20 minutes, depending on
the outside temperature.
NOTE
•
On certain markets, the defrost function
may remain on longer than 20 minutes
in cold weather to help keep the rear
window free from ice or condensation.
10. Temperature selector
The temperatures on the driv-
er's and passenger's sides
can be set separately using
the knob (with the thermome-
ter in it). The temperature can
be set for both sides of the car
when the ignition is switched
on (both LEDs will be on), which means that a
temperature setting will apply to both sides of
the car.
To set the temperature on one side of the car:
1. Press the knob once. The LED for one side
of the car will light up. Turn the knob to
adjust the temperature.
2. Press the knob a second time to set the
temperature on the opposite side of the
car.
3. Press the knob a third time to set the tem-
perature on both sides of the car at the
same time.
NOTE
Selecting a temperature that is higher or
lower than necessary will not heat or cool
the passenger compartment faster.
03 Climate
Air distribution
03
99
Air distribution Use: Air distribution Use:
Defroster.
Air is not recirculated in
this mode.
Air conditioning is always
engaged.
There is also a certain
amount of airflow to the
panel air vents.
Defrost/de-fog the wind-
shield and front side win-
dows.
Air to the floor and win-
dows.
There is also a certain
amount of airflow to the
dashboard air vents.
For comfortable condi-
tions and good defrosting
in cold weather.
Medium to high blower
speed.
Air to windshield and front
side windows.
There is also a certain
amount of airflow to the
dashboard air vents.
Prevents fogging in cold
or humid weather (blower
speed should be moder-
ate to high).
Air to the floor and from
the dashboard air vents.
For sunny weather with
cool ambient tempera-
tures.
Air to the windows and
from the dashboard air
vents.
For good comfort in
warm, dry weather.
Air to the floor.
There is a certain amount
of airflow to the dash-
board and window air
vents.
To warm the feet.
Airflow directed to the
head and chest from the
dashboard air vents.
To ensure efficient cooling
in a warm weather.
Airflow to the windows,
dashboard air vents, and
floor.
For cooler air toward the
feet, or for warmer air
toward the head and
chest.
G020908
100
Front seats............................................................................................ 102
Interior lighting...................................................................................... 106
Storage compartments......................................................................... 107
Rear seat............................................................................................... 111
Cargo area............................................................................................ 113
04
INTERIOR
04 Interior
Front seats
04
102
Manual seat adjustment
G020197
The driver's and passenger's seats can be
adjusted in a number of ways to provide a
comfortable driving and sitting position.
Forward-rearward: Pull the lever up and
slide the seat to the position of your choice.
Use this control to raise or lower the front
edge of the seat cushion.
Use this control to raise or lower the rear
edge of the seat cushion.
Turn this knob (option on some passeng-
er's seats) to adjust the firmness of the
lumbar support
1
.
Turn this knob to adjust the backrest tilt.
Control panel for power seats.
WARNING
•
Do not adjust the seat while driving.
•
Adjust the driver’s seat and seat belt
(see page 18) before driving. The seat
should be adjusted so that the brake
pedal can be depressed fully.
•
Position the seat as far rearward as
comfort and control allow.
Accessing the rear seat
G020198
Seat access buttons (power seat shown)
Seat adjustment handle
Seat adjustment button
Manual seat
Moving the seat forward:
1. Remove the seat belt from its guide (see
page 19).
2. Pull up handle 1 (see the illustration), hold
it up, and fold the backrest forward until it
locks in position.
3. Slide the seat forward.
1
Also applies to the optional power seat.
04 Interior
Front seats
04
``
103
Moving the seat rearward:
1.
With the backrest folded forward in the
locked position, slide the seat rearward
until it stops/locks in its original position.
2. Pull up handle 1, hold it up, and fold up the
backrest to the upright position.
3. Return the seat belt to its guide.
Power seat
Moving the seat forward:
1. Remove the seat belt from its guide (see
page 19).
2. Pull up handle 1, hold it up, and fold the
backrest forward until it locks in position.
3. Press and hold button 2 while the seat
moves forward.
Moving the seat rearward:
1.
With the backrest folded forward in the
locked position, press and hold down
button 2 until the seat has returned to its
original position.
2. Pull up handle 1, hold it up, and fold up the
backrest to the upright position.
3. Return the seat belt to its guide.
The front passenger's seat belt should be in its
guide while the vehicle is being driven, even if
the seat is not occupied.
WARNING
After the seat has been returned to its orig-
inal position, be sure that the backrest is
securely locked in the upright position.
Power seats (option)
The power driver's seat can be adjusted:
•
If the ignition key is in position I or II.
•
During a 10 minute period after the doors
have been unlocked if the door remains
open.
•
If the door is closed and the ignition key is
not yet in the ignition, or if the key is in
position 0, the seat can be adjusted or dur-
ing a period of 40 seconds. The power
passenger's seat can only be adjusted if
the ignition key is in position I or II, or if the
engine is running.
Adjusting the seat
G020199
Seat adjustment controls
Seat adjustment controls 1, 2, 3, and 4 on the
side of the seat can be used to move the seat
to the position of your choice.
Move this section of the control up or down
to raise/lower the front section of the seat
cushion.
Move the control forward/rearward to
move the seat forward or rearward.
Move this section of the control up or down
to raise/lower the rear section of the seat
cushion.
Backrest tilt.
04 Interior
Front seats
04
104
NOTE
The power seats have an overload protector
that activates if a seat is blocked by any
object. If this occurs, switch off the ignition
(key in position 0) and wait for approxi-
mately 20 seconds before operating the
seat again.
Emergency stop
If the seat inadvertently begins to move, press
any of the buttons to stop the seat.
Programming the seat memory, driver's
seat only (option)
G020200
Power seat memory buttons
Three different seating positions can be stored
in the seat's memory. The memory buttons are
located on the outboard side of the driver's
seat (see the illustration above). The following
example explains how memory button 1 can be
programmed. Buttons 2 and 3 can be pro-
grammed in the same way.
To program (store) a seat position in memory
button 1:
1. Adjust the seat to the desired position.
2.
Press and hold down the "M" (Memory)
button.
3.
With the "M" button depressed, press
memory button 1 to store the seat's current
position.
To move the seat to the position that it was in
when memory button 1 was programmed,
press and hold down button 1 until the seat
stops moving.
As a safety precaution, the seat will stop auto-
matically if the button is released before the
seat has reached the preset position.
Central locking system remote control
and driver's seat memory
The remote control transmitter can also be
equipped with an optional function that con-
trols the electrically operated driver's seat in
the following way:
1. Adjust the seat to the desired position.
2. When you leave the car, lock it using the
remote control.
3. The next time the driver's door is unlocked
with the same remote control and that door
is opened within 2 minutes, the driver's
seat and side door mirrors will automati-
cally move to the position that they were in
when the doors were most recently locked
with the same remote control.
NOTE
The memory function in the remote control
operates independently the memory func-
tion in the seat.
04 Interior
Front seats
04
105
WARNING
•
Because the driver's seat can be
adjusted with the ignition off, children
should never be left unattended in the
car.
•
Movement of the seat can be STOPPED
at any time by pressing any button on
the power seat control panel.
•
Do not adjust the seat while driving. The
seat should be adjusted so that the
brake pedal can be depressed fully. In
addition, position the seat as far rear-
ward as comfort and control allow.
•
The seat rails on the floor must not be
obstructed in any way when the seat is
in motion.
04 Interior
Interior lighting
04
106
Interior lighting
G020201
Front courtesy lights and reading lights
Front driver's side reading light, on/off
Courtesy lighting
Front passenger's side reading light, on/off
The front seat reading lights can be switched
on and off by pressing buttons (1) or (3) when
the ignition key is position I or II, or when the
engine is running.
The courtesy lighting (2) can be set to three
positions:
•
Press the left side of the button: the interior
courtesy lighting turns on.
•
Neutral position: the interior courtesy light-
ing comes on when a door is opened, and
is switched off 10 seconds after the door is
closed.
•
Press the right side of the button: the inte-
rior courtesy lighting stays off.
Courtesy lighting – automatic function
The interior lighting has a built-in automatic
function that switches on the courtesy lighting
for 30 seconds when:
•
the car is unlocked from the outside using
the key or remote control
•
the engine is switched off and the ignition
key is turned to the 0 position.
The courtesy lighting lights up or remains on
for 5 minutes when:
•
one of the doors is opened and left open.
•
the courtesy lighting has not been
switched off (the right side of button 2
depressed).
The automatic lighting goes out when:
•
the engine is started
•
the car is locked from the outside using the
key or remote control.
If the courtesy lighting is not switched off man-
ually, it will be turned off automatically
5 minutes after the engine has been switched
off.
Footwell lighting
The footwell (and courtesy lighting) comes on
or goes off when one of the side doors is
opened or closed.
Vanity mirror
G020210
Raise the cover to switch on the light.
04 Interior
Storage compartments
04
``
107
2 3 4
5
6
7
G031470
04 Interior
Storage compartments
04
108
Compartment in door panel
Storage pocket (on the front side of the
front seat cushion, depending on choice of
upholstery)
Jacket hanger (intended for light garments
only)
Glove compartment
Storage compartment for e.g., CDs and
cup holders
Compartment in rear side panels, with
space for up to three beverage cans
Rear seat storage compartment and cup
holders
Compartment on rear side of front seat
backrests
WARNING
•
Anchor any heavy objects to prevent
them from moving during sudden stops.
•
Packages on the rear parcel shelf can
obscure vision and may become dan-
gerous projectiles in the event of a sud-
den stop or an accident.
Glove compartment
G024208
The owners manual and maps can be stored
here. There are also holders for coins, pens and
fuel cards. The glove compartment can only be
locked and unlocked using the detachable key
blade from the central locking system's remote
control. See page 120 for information on
removing the key blade from the remote con-
trol, and page 127 for information about lock-
ing the glove compartment.
Jacket hanger
G018137
The jacket hanger is located on the inboard
side of the front passenger's seat head
restraint. It is only intended for hanging light
garments.
04 Interior
Storage compartments
04
``
109
Storage under the front, center armrest
G018371
There are two storage compartments under the
front, center armrest.
•
Press the smaller button on the front edge
of the armrest and lift the armrest cover to
access a shallow storage compartment.
•
Press the larger button and lift the entire
armrest to access a deeper compartment.
CD storage
G026704
The deep storage compartment has room for
10 CD jewel cases. These cases must be
inserted with their spines upward in order to
allow space for 10 cases in the storage com-
partment
Cup holders in the center console
G018372
Two cup holders are located under the sliding
cover in the center console.
The cup holders can be lifted out if necessary.
To do so, grasp the indentation on the rear
edge of the cup holder and lift.
To put the cup holder back in place:
1. Slide the two locating tabs in the front side
of the cup holder into the two correspond-
ing recesses in the center console storage
space.
2. Press down the rear edge of the cup
holder.
To close the sliding cover, grasp the underside
of the front edge and pull.
04 Interior
Storage compartments
04
110
Storage compartment behind the gear
lever
G019623
If the buttons for optional equipment are not
installed, the recess behind the gear lever can
be used as a storage compartment for coins,
etc.
04 Interior
Rear seat
04
``
111
Folding down the rear seat backrests
G009109
Both sections of the rear seat backrest can be
folded down, together or separately, to enable
you to transport long objects.
To fold down one or both sections:
1. Pull the catch on the upper outboard edge
of the backrest upward and forward to
release the backrest lock. A red lock indi-
cator (A) is visible when the backrest is not
locked in the upright position.
2. Fold the backrest down.
G007608
WARNING
•
The red lock indicator is VISIBLE when
the backrest is NOT locked in position
and hidden when the backrest is cor-
rectly locked in place. When the back-
rest is in the upright position, it must
always be correctly locked in place.
•
When the rear seat is folded down, do
not place heavy objects against the
backs of the front seats. This places a
severe strain on the folded down back-
rest of the rear seat. Be sure to secure
cargo.
•
Cargo must not be stacked higher than
the top of seat backs. This will reduce
the possibility of luggage, etc. becom-
ing projectiles during sudden maneu-
vers, rapid braking or an accident.
04 Interior
Rear seat
04
112
Rear seat armrest (option)
G009152
The center armrest can be folded down for
comfort or to make room for long objects. The
armrest folds down automatically when one of
the backrests is folded down.
WARNING
Long loads should be securely anchored.
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
``
113
Load anchoring eyelets
G007602
The eyelets in the cargo area can be used to
fasten accessory load nets and lashing straps,
load nets, and other load anchors.
Hard cargo area cover (option)
G009475
Installing the cargo area cover
1. Before lifting cover into the vehicle, retract
all four lock pins by pulling back the lock
buttons as far as possible. The pins will
remain retracted.
2. Lift the cover into the vehicle at an angle,
turn it back and raise the front edge
slightly.
3. Place the front section of the cover on the
two support pins behind the locking points
(A) on both sides of the vehicle.
G007611
4.
Place one of the rear locks at (B) and slide
the lock pin into position by moving the
lock button forward.
5. Put the other rear lock into position in the
same way and slide the lock pin into posi-
tion by moving the lock button forward.
6. Slide the front lock buttons forward, one at
a time, so that the lock pins move into
position (A).
NOTE
The rear section of the cover can be folded
up when loading items into the cargo area.
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
114
WARNING
The cargo area cover does not have a load
anchoring function. No item should be place
on top of the cargo area cover. These items
could move forward and cause injury during
braking.
Removing the cover
1.
Retract the front lock pins at (A) by pulling
back the lock buttons on both sides as far
as possible.
2.
Retract the rear lock pins at (B) by pulling
back the lock buttons on both sides as far
as possible.
3. Lift up and turn the cover before lifting it out
of the vehicle.
Soft cargo area cover (option)
G007614
The cargo area cover is pulled over the cargo
area and fastened to the eyelets with the hooks
on the corners of the cover.
Installing the cover
1. Attach the front lower hooks on the cover
to the lower eyelets (A) on opposite sides
of the vehicle.
2.
Insert the front upper attachments (B) by
pressing together the spring-loaded rails
and pressing them into place on opposite
sides of the vehicle.
3.
Insert the upper rear rails (C) in the same
way.
4. Attach the rear lower hooks on the cover to
the lower eyelets (D) on opposite sides of
the vehicle.
Hanging the cover when it is not in use
1.
Remove the rear hooks (D) from the eye-
lets.
2.
Press together the rear rails (C) and remove
them from their attachments. Place them
at the front of the cargo area floor.
3. Attach the hooks in the rail next to the
attachments (B).
The cargo area cover is now hanging near the
rear seat backrests until it is needed again.
Removing the cargo area cover
1. Remove the hooks and remove the rails
one at a time by pressing them together
and removing them from their attach-
ments.
2. When all attachments have been removed,
the cover can be rolled up and placed on
the rear part of the cargo area floor to make
room for cargo.
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
115
WARNING
The cargo area cover does not have a load
anchoring function. No item should be place
on top of the cargo area cover. These items
could move forward and cause injury during
braking.
Cargo area net (option)
G007603
The cargo area net can be placed behind the
front seat backrests.This net is only intended
to be used when the rear seat backrests are
folded down.
Installing the net
1. Fold down the rear seat backrests (see
page 111).
2. Attach the cargo net to the upper mounting
brackets near the ceiling.
3. Attach the cargo net’s hooks in the eyelets
near the seat belts floor anchorages on
opposite sides of the vehicle.
4. Pull the cargo net’s bands taut if neces-
sary.
WARNING
•
Be sure that the net is securely attached
in the mounting brackets and eyelets.
•
Cargo should be properly secured even
when the net is in use.
Removing the cargo net
1. Release the pressure on the bands.
2. Remove the hooks from the eyelets near
the floor.
3. Remove the net from the ceiling mounting
brackets.
4. Fold the net and keep it in its storage bag.
Folding up the cargo area floor hatch
G014316
Without the cargo area cover
Fold up the hatch and attach it to the latches
on both sides of the cargo area.
With the hard cover in place
1. Fold up the hatch on the cargo area cover.
2. Fold up the floor hatch and fasten it to the
hook on the underside of the cargo area
cover.
116
Remote control and key blade.............................................................. 118
Keyless drive (option as available)........................................................ 123
Locking and unlocking.......................................................................... 127
Alarm (option)........................................................................................ 129
05
LOCKS AND ALARM
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control and key blade
05
118
Remote controls
Two remote controls that also function as igni-
tion keys are provided with your car. The
remote controls contain detachable metal key
blades for manually locking or unlocking the
driver's door and the glove compartment.
USA – FCC ID: LTQVO315TX
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following con-
ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation.
Canada – IC: 3659AVO315TX
Operation is subject to the following condi-
tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Loss of a remote control
If either of the remote controls is lost, the other
must be taken with the car to a Volvo retailer.
As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lost
remote control must be erased from the sys-
tem.
Each key blade has a unique code, which is
used if new key blades are required. A maxi-
mum of six remote controls/key blades can be
programmed and used for one car.
Immobilizer (start inhibitor)
Each of the keys supplied with your car con-
tains a coded transponder. The code in the key
is transmitted to an antenna in the ignition
switch where it is compared to the code stored
in the start inhibitor module. The car will start
only with a properly coded key. If you misplace
a key, take the other keys to an authorized
Volvo retailer for reprogramming as an antitheft
measure.
USA – FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following con-
dition: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation.
Canada – IC: 3659A-WFS125VO
Operation is subject to the following condi-
tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
Never use force on the narrow section of the
remote control – this is where the trans-
ponder is located. The car cannot be started
if the transponder is damaged.
Remote control functions
G019402
Lock – Press the Lock button on the
remote once to lock all doors and the lift-
gate. The turn signals will flash once to
confirm locking.
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control and key blade
05
``
119
NOTE
The car can also be locked if a door is open
(does not apply to vehicles with the optional
keyless drive).
Unlock – Press the Unlock button on the
remote once to unlock the driver's door.
After a short pause, press the Unlock but-
ton a second time within 10 seconds to
unlock the other doors and the liftgate. A
long press (at least several seconds) opens
all side windows.
NOTE
•
The turn signals flash to confirm that the
vehicle has been correctly locked/
unlocked with the remote control or the
optional keyless drive. When locking the
vehicle, the turn signals will flash a con-
firmation only if all the doors are
securely closed and locked. Flashing
confirmation for locking and unlocking
may be customized in the vehicle's Per-
sonal settings menu, see page 82 for
more information.
•
The two-step unlocking function can be
changed so that one press of the
Unlock button unlocks all of the doors
and the liftgate. See Personal settings
page 82 for more information.
•
Automatic relocking: If the doors are
unlocked, the locks will automatically reen-
gage (re-lock) and the alarm will rearm after
2 minutes unless a door or the liftgate has
been opened.
•
Automatic locking: When the car starts to
move, the doors and liftgate can be locked
automatically. This feature can be turned
on or off, see Personal settings on page
82 for more information.
•
Airbag deployment will automatically
attempt to unlock the doors.
Approach lighting – As you approach the
car: Press the button on the remote control
to illuminate the area around the car in dark
conditions. Pressing the button once lights
up the interior lighting, parking lights, and
license plate lighting. These lights will
switch off automatically after 30, 60 or
90 seconds. See the Personal settings pa
ge 82 for information about adjusting the
time setting.
Unlock liftgate – Press the button once to
disarm the alarm system and unlock only
the liftgate. After closing, the liftgate will
not automatically relock. Press Lock to
relock it and rearm the alarm.
NOTE
This function will not open the liftgate.
Panic alarm – This button can be used to
attract attention during emergency situa-
tions. To activate the panic alarm, press
and hold the red button for at least 3 sec-
onds or press it twice within 3 seconds.
The turn signals and horn will be activated.
The panic alarm will stop automatically
after 30 seconds. To deactivate, wait
approximately 5 seconds and press the red
button again.
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control and key blade
05
120
NOTE
This button will NOT unlock the car.
Weak battery in the remote control
G019406
When the battery begins to lose its charge, the
Information symbol in the instrument panel
(see page 55) lights up and KEY BATTERY
LOW VOLTAGE
is shown in the information
display.
Replacing the battery in the remote
control
If the range of the transmitter is noticeably
reduced, this indicates that the battery (type
CR 2450, 3V) is weak and should be replaced.
To replace the battery:
1. Place the remote control with the keypad
downward. Pry open the cover with a small
slotted screwdriver.
2. Remove the cover.
CAUTION
When replacing the battery, avoid touching
the electrical circuitry in the other half of the
remote control.
3. Note how the + and – sides of the battery
are positioned on the inside of the cover
(see the underside of the cover).
4. Pry out and replace the battery. Avoid
touching the battery and its contact surfa-
ces with your fingers.
5. Press the cover back into place.
The old battery should be disposed of properly
at a recycling center or by a trained and quali-
fied Volvo service technician.
Key blade
G019403
Removing the key blade
The key blade can be removed from the remote
control. When removed, it can be used as fol-
lows:
•
To lock/unlock the driver’s door
•
To lock/unlock the glove compartment,
see page 127
Removing the key blade
Slide the spring loaded catch to the side.
While holding the catch, pull the key blade
out of the remote control.
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control and key blade
05
``
121
Reinserting the key blade in the remote
control
1. Hold the remote control with the pointed
end down.
2. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove.
3. Gently press the key blade in the groove
until it clicks into place.
Unlocking the doors with the detached
key blade
±
Insert the key blade as far as possible in the
driver's door lock. Turn the key blade
clockwise approximately one-quarter turn
to unlock the driver's door only.
NOTE
After unlocking the driver's door with the
key blade, opening the door will trigger the
alarm.
To disable the alarm
Press the Unlock button on the remote control,
or insert the key in the ignition switch.
Locking the doors with the detached key
blade
1. Lock the other door(s) by pressing the lock
button on each door. Please note that this
does not arm the alarm or lock the liftgate.
2. Turn the key blade one-quarter turn coun-
ter-clockwise to lock the driver's door.
Locking points
By utilizing the remote control with the key
blade removed, you can block access to the
glove compartment for e.g. valet parking or
when the car is brought to the retailer for serv-
ice.
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control and key blade
05
122
G019405
Locking/unlocking points for the remote
control with the key blade
Locking/unlocking points for the remote
control without the key blade
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive (option as available)
05
``
123
Keyless locking and unlocking
G007577
Range of the keyless drive remote control–5 ft
(1.5 meters)
This system makes it possible to unlock and
lock the vehicle without having to use the
remote control. It is only necessary to have a
keyless drive remote control in your posses-
sion to operate the central locking system.
NOTE
The buttons on the keyless drive remote
control can also be used to lock and unlock
the vehicle, see page 118 for more informa-
tion.
Both of the remote controls provided with the
vehicle have the keyless function, and addi-
tional remotes can be ordered. The system can
accommodate up to six keyless drive remote
controls.
NOTE
The number of doors that are unlocked at
the same time can be set in the Personal
settings menu, see page 82 for additional
information.
Unlocking the vehicle
•
A keyless drive remote control must be on
the same side of the vehicle as the door to
be opened, and be within 5 feet
(1.5 meters) of the lock or the liftgate open-
ing control (see the shaded areas in the
illustration).
•
Pull a door handle to unlock and open the
door or press the liftgate opening control
on the liftgate.
•
See page 144 for information on starting a
vehicle equipped with keyless drive.
Locking the vehicle
G020033
Keyless drive lock button
The doors and the liftgate can be locked by
pressing the lock button in any of the outside
door handles.
NOTE
•
If one or more doors and/or the liftgate
is not fully closed when the lock button
is pressed, the door(s) or liftgate will not
be locked.
•
On keyless drive vehicles with an auto-
matic transmission, the gear selector
must be in the Park (P) position and the
ignition must be switched off before the
doors/liftgate can be locked.
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive (option as available)
05
124
Locking or unlocking the vehicle with the
key blade
G020225
Keyless drive keyhole cover
The driver's door on vehicles equipped with
keyless drive can be locked or unlocked with
the remote control's detachable key blade if
necessary, see page 120 for information on
removing the key blade from the remote con-
trol. To access the keyhole in the driver's door:
•
Pry off the keyhole cover by inserting the
key blade or a small screwdriver in the hole
on the underside of the cover (indicated by
the arrow in the inset illustration).
•
Insert the key blade as far as possible in the
driver's door lock. Turn the key blade
clockwise approximately one-quarter turn
to unlock the driver's door only. This will
trigger the alarm.
•
To disable the alarm: Press the Unlock
button on the keyless drive remote control.
If the batteries in the remote are weak,
remove the keyless drive start control from
the ignition switch by pressing the catch
(see the illustration on page 144) and pull-
ing the control out of the ignition switch.
Insert the ignition key section of a keyless
drive remote control in the ignition switch.
Keyless drive remote control and driver's
seat memory
This function is only available on vehicles
equipped with the optional power driver's seat.
•
When you leave the car with a keyless drive
remote control in your possession and lock
any door, the position of the driver's seat
will be stored in the seat's memory.
•
The next time a door is opened by a person
with the same remote control in his/her
possession, the driver's seat will automat-
ically move to the position that it was in
when the door was most recently locked.
NOTE
If several people carrying keyless drive
remote controls approach the vehicle at the
same time, the driver's seat will assume the
position it was in for the person who opens
a door first.
Keyless drive information messages
If anyone leaves the vehicle with the only key-
less drive remote control in his or her posses-
sion while the ignition is switched on, a
message will be shown in the information dis-
play and an audible signal will sound.
NOTE
This message will only be displayed if the
start control is in position I or II.
The message will be erased from the display
and the audible signal will stop when the
remote control has been returned to the vehicle
and one of the following has occurred:
•
A door has been opened and closed
•
The start control has been turned to posi-
tion 0
•
The READ button (see page 60 for the
location of this button) has been pressed.
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive (option as available)
05
``
125
CAUTION
•
Keyless drive remote controls should
never be left in the vehicle. In the event
of a break-in, a remote found in the
vehicle could make it possible to start
the engine.
•
Electromagnetic fields or metal
obstructions can interfere with the key-
less drive system. Avoid placing the
remote control near cellular phones,
metallic objects or e.g., in a metal brief-
case.
Canada – IC:267T- 5WK48952,
267T- 5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891
NOTE
This device complies with RSS -210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept interference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952,
KR55WK48964
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept interference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
Siemens VDO
5WK48891
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
For Automobile Use
Location of the keyless drive antennas
The keyless drive system has a number of
antennas located at various points in the vehi-
cle.
G020075
On the inside center of the rear bumper
Under the floor of the cargo area, near the
rear seat
Left door handle
Under the rear section of the center con-
sole
Right door handle
Under the front section of the center con-
sole
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive (option as available)
05
126
WARNING
People with implanted pacemakers should
not allow the pacemaker to come closer
than 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keyless
drive system's antennas. This is to help pre-
vent interference between the pacemaker
and the keylesss drive system.
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
``
127
Locking/unlocking the vehicle from the
inside
G007451
The switches near the door opening handles on
either door can be used to lock or unlock both
doors and the liftgate, open the windows in the
doors
1
, and to set the alarm.
•
Unlocking: Press the upper section of the
switch. A long press (for several seconds)
also opens the windows in the doors.
•
Locking: Press the lower section of the
lock button.
NOTE
•
The ignition key must be in position I or
higher (see page 141) before the win-
dows in the doors can be opened using
the switches in the front doors.
•
The doors cannot be opened by pulling
up the lock buttons.
•
If both doors are closed when a lock
button is pressed, the alarm will not be
armed.
•
Each door can also be locked manually
using the lock button on that particular
door. This applies only if the car has not
been locked from the outside.
•
The doors can also be unlocked (and
the door opened) by pulling the handle
in the door twice.
Locking the glove compartment
G020034
The glove compartment can only be locked
and unlocked using the detachable key blade
on the remote control, see page 120 for infor-
mation on removing the key blade from the
remote control.
Insert the key blade in the glove compart-
ment lock.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
The key slot will be in the horizontal posi-
tion.
Remove the key blade from the lock.
1
This function must be set to On in the Personal settings menu (see page 83)
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
128
Unlock the glove compartment in the reverse
order.
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm (option)
05
``
129
The alarm system
The alarm is automatically armed whenever the
car is locked with the remote control, or if a
front lock button is depressed.
When armed, the alarm continuously monitors
a number of points on the car. The following
conditions will trigger the alarm:
•
The hood is forced open.
•
The liftgate is forced open.
•
A door is forced open.
•
The ignition switch is tampered with
•
An attempt is made to start the car with a
non-approved key (a key not coded to the
car's ignition).
•
If there is movement in the passenger com-
partment (if the car is equipped with the
optional movement sensor).
•
The car is lifted or towed (if the car is equip-
ped with the optional inclination sensor)
•
The battery is disconnected (while the
alarm is armed).
•
The siren is disconnected when the alarm
is disarmed.
•
The liftgate window is broken.
The alarm indicator light
G020227
Alarm indicator light
The status of the alarm system is indicated by
the indicator light on at the top of the dash-
board (see the illustration):
•
Indicator light off – the alarm is not armed
•
The indicator light flashes every two sec-
onds – the alarm is armed
•
The indicator light flashes rapidly before
the ignition is switched on – the alarm has
been triggered. The message "ALARM
TRIGGERED
, CHECK CAR" will also be
displayed.
•
Fault in the alarm system: If a fault has
been detected in the alarm system, a mes-
sage will be shown in the information dis-
play. Contact your Volvo retailer to have
the alarm system inspected and repaired if
necessary.
Arming the alarm
Press the LOCK button on the remote control,
or press the central lock button on one of the
front doors with the door open. One long flash
of the turn signals will confirm that the alarm is
armed.
Disarming the alarm
Press the UNLOCK button on the remote con-
trol or insert the key in the ignition
1
to disarm
the alarm. Two short flashes from the car's
direction indicators confirm that the alarm has
been deactivated and that all doors are
unlocked.
1
On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, press in the start control in the ignition switch.
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm (option)
05
130
Turning off (stopping) the alarm
If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by
pressing the UNLOCK button on the remote
control or by inserting the key in the ignition
switch. The driver's door must first be
unlocked with the key blade.
NOTE
On vehicles equipped with the optional key-
less drive, the start control must be
removed from the ignition switch before the
key can be inserted, see page 144 for
instructions.
Audible/visual alarm signal
An audible alarm signal is given by a battery
powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts for
30 seconds.
NOTE
The visual alarm signal is given by flashing
all turn signals and turning on the interior
lighting for approximately 5 minutes.
Temporarily turning off the accessory
alarm sensor(s)
G026313
Display
MENU
EXIT
ENTER
Menu navigation controls
In certain situations it may be desirable to turn
off the accessory inclination and movement
alarm sensors if, for example, you drive your
vehicle onto a ferry where the rocking of the
boat could trigger the alarm or if a pet is left in
the vehicle with the doors locked.
To do so:
1.
Press MENU to enter the menu system and
scroll to
Car settings (for a more detailed
description of the menus, see page 82.
2.
Select
Reduced guard.
3.
Select Activate once and the message
Reduced guard – See manual will
appear in the information display. The
alarm sensors will be turned off when the
vehicle is locked.
or
Select
Ask on exit. Each time the ignition
key is turned to position 0, the message
Press ENTER to reduce guard until
engine is started. Press EXIT to
cancel
will be displayed. Select one of the
alternatives:
•
if the alarm sensors are to be deactivated,
press ENTER and then lock the vehicle.
The next time the ignition key is turned to posi-
tion II, the sensors will be reactivated and Full
guard
will displayed.
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm (option)
05
131
or
If you do not wish to deactivate the sensors, do
not choose an alternative and lock the vehicle
or press EXIT and lock the vehicle.
CAUTION
•
The accessory sensors are automati-
cally reconnected to the alarm system
the next time the vehicle is unlocked
and then locked again.
•
This function will not turn off the vehi-
cle's standard alarm.
U.S.A. FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following con-
ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation.
Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3)
Movement sensor DA5823 by Dynex Operation
is subject to the following conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
G020912
132
General information............................................................................... 134
Fuel requirements................................................................................. 138
Ignition switch....................................................................................... 141
Starting the vehicle............................................................................... 142
Starting the vehicle with keyless drive (option as available)................. 144
Manual transmission, 6-speed (certain markets only).......................... 145
Automatic transmission (option)........................................................... 146
Shiftlock override.................................................................................. 148
Brake system........................................................................................ 149
Stability system..................................................................................... 151
Towing................................................................................................... 153
Jump starting........................................................................................ 155
Transporting loads................................................................................ 156
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)–option...................................... 157
Park assist (Option/accessory)............................................................. 161
06
STARTING AND DRIVING
06 Starting and driving
General information
06
134
Economical driving conserves natural
resources
Better driving economy may be obtained by
thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops
and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to
immediate traffic conditions.
Observe the following rules:
•
Bring the engine to normal operating tem-
perature as soon as possible by driving
with a light foot on the accelerator pedal for
the first few minutes of operation. A cold
engine uses more fuel and is subject to
increased wear.
•
Whenever possible, avoid using the vehicle
for driving short distances. This does not
allow the engine to reach normal operating
temperature.
•
Drive carefully and avoid rapid acceleration
and hard braking.
•
Use the transmission's Drive (D) position
as often as possible and avoid using kick-
down.
•
Do not exceed posted speed limits.
•
Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra
load) in the vehicle.
•
Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire
pressure regularly (when tires are cold).
•
Remove snow tires when threat of snow or
ice has ended.
•
Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc,
increase air resistance and also fuel con-
sumption.
•
At highway driving speeds, fuel consump-
tion will be lower with the air conditioning
on and the windows closed than with the
air conditioning off and the windows open.
•
Using the onboard trip computer's fuel
consumption modes can help you learn
how to drive more economically.
Other factors that decrease gas mileage
are:
•
Dirty air cleaner
•
Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter
•
Dragging brakes
•
Incorrect front end alignment
Some of the above mentioned items and others
are checked at the standard maintenance
intervals.
WARNING
Driving with the liftgate open: Driving with
the liftgate open could lead to poisonous
exhaust gases entering the passenger com-
partment. If the liftgate must be kept open
for any reason, proceed as follows:
1. Close the windows.
2. Set the ventilation system control to air
flow to floor, windshield and side win-
dows and the blower control to its high-
est setting.
Weight distribution affects handling
At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a
tendency to understeer, which means that the
steering wheel has to be turned more than
might seem appropriate for the curvature of a
bend. This ensures good stability and reduces
the risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that
these properties can alter with the vehicle load.
The heavier the load in the cargo area, the less
the tendency to understeer.
06 Starting and driving
General information
06
``
135
Handling, roadholding
Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressure
all affect vehicle handling. Therefore, check
that the tires are inflated to the recommended
pressure according to the vehicle load. See the
"Tire pressure" section. Loads should be dis-
tributed so that capacity weight or maximum
permissible axle loads are not exceeded.
Driving through water
The vehicle can be driven through water up to
a depth of approximately 9 in. (25 cm), at a
maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h).
•
Take particular care when driving through
flowing water.
•
Clean the electrical connections for trailer
wiring after driving in mud or water
•
When driving through water, maintain low
speed and do not stop in the water.
WARNING
After driving through water, press lightly on
the brake pedal to ensure that the brakes
are functioning normally. Water or mud can
make the brake linings slippery, resulting in
delayed braking effect.
CAUTION
•
Engine damage will occur if water is
drawn into the air cleaner.
•
If the vehicle is driven through water
deeper than 9 in (25 cm), water may
enter the differential and the transmis-
sion. This reduces the oil's lubricating
capacity and may shorten the service
life of these components.
•
Do not allow the vehicle to stand in
water up to the door sills longer than
absolutely necessary. This could result
in electrical malfunctions.
•
If the engine has been stopped while the
car is in water, do not attempt to restart
the engine. Have the car towed out of
the water.
Cold weather precautions
If you wish to check your vehicle before the
approach of cold weather, the following advice
is worth noting:
•
Make sure that the engine coolant contains
50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture
will reduce freeze protection. This gives
protection against freezing down to –31 °F
(–35 °C). See section "Coolant". The use of
"recycled" antifreeze is not approved by
Volvo. Different types of antifreeze must
not be mixed.
•
Volvo recommends using only genuine
Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.
Your Volvo retailer stocks plenty of Volvo
engine coolant to help protect your vehicle
during cold weather.
•
Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this
prevents the formation of condensation in
the tank. In addition, in extremely cold
weather conditions it is worthwhile to add
fuel line de-icer before refueling.
•
The viscosity of the engine oil is important.
Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves
cold-weather starting as well as decreas-
ing fuel consumption while the engine is
warming up. For winter use, 5W-30 oil, par-
ticularly the synthetic type
1
, is recom-
mended. Be sure to use good quality oil but
do not use cold-weather oil for hard driving
or in warm weather, see page 259 for more
information.
•
The load placed on the battery is greater
during the winter since the windshield wip-
ers, lighting, etc. are used more often.
Moreover, the capacity of the battery
decreases as the temperature drops. In
very cold weather, a poorly charged bat-
tery can freeze and be damaged. It is there-
fore advisable to check the state of charge
1
Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance intervals except at owner request and at additional charge. Please consult your Volvo retailer.
06 Starting and driving
General information
06
136
more frequently and spray an anti-rust oil
on the battery posts.
•
Volvo recommends the use of snow tires
on all four wheels for winter driving – see
the chapter "Wheels and tires."
•
To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from
freezing, add washer solvents containing
antifreeze (see page 205 for the location of
the washer fluid reservoir). This is impor-
tant since dirt is often splashed on the
windshield during winter driving, requiring
the frequent use of the washers and wip-
ers. Volvo Washer Solvent should be dilu-
ted as follows: Down to 14 °F (–10 °C): 1
part washer solvent and 4 parts water
Down to 5° F (–15° C): 1 part washer sol-
vent and 3 parts water Down to 0° F
(–18° C): 1 part washer solvent and 2 parts
water Down to –18° F (–28° C): 1 part
washer solvent and 1 part water.
•
Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.
NOTE
Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can
cause damage to the locks.
Conserving electrical current
Keep the following in mind to help minimize
battery drain:
•
When the engine is not running, avoid turn-
ing the ignition key to position II. Many
electrical systems (the audio system, the
optional navigation system, power win-
dows, etc) will function with the ignition key
in position I. This position reduces drain on
the battery.
•
Please keep in mind that using systems,
accessories, etc that consume a great deal
of current when the engine is not running
could result in the battery being completely
drained.
•
The optional 12 volt socket in the cargo
area (certain models only) provides electri-
cal current even with the ignition switched
off, which drains the battery.
NOTE
•
If the ignition is switched on, a warning
message will be displayed in the text
window in the instrument panel when
the battery charge is low.
•
An energy conserving function
designed into the vehicle's electrical
system will switch off certain functions
or reduce the load on the battery by,
e.g., reducing the audio system's vol-
ume.
Before a long distance trip
It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle
checked at a trained and qualified Volvo serv-
ice technician before driving long distances.
Your trained and qualified Volvo service tech-
nician will also be able to supply you with
bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades for
your use in the event that problems occur.
As a minimum, the following items should be
checked before any long trip:
•
Check that engine runs smoothly and that
fuel consumption is normal.
•
Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage
•
Have the transmission oil level checked
2
.
•
Check condition of drive belts.
2
To prevent injury from contact with hot surfaces, do not inspect your vehicle's transmission fluid yourself. Have your vehicle's transmission fluid level inspected by a qualified Volvo service technician.
06 Starting and driving
General information
06
137
•
Check state of the battery's charge.
•
Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as
well), and replace those that are worn.
Check tire pressures.
•
The brakes, front wheel alignment, and
steering gear should be checked by your
Volvo retailer only.
•
Check all lights, including high beams.
•
Reflective warning triangles are legally
required in some states/provinces.
•
Have a word with your Volvo retailer if you
intend to drive in countries where it may be
difficult to obtain the correct fuel.
•
Consider your destination. If you will be
driving through an area where snow or ice
are likely to occur, consider snow tires.
06 Starting and driving
Fuel requirements
06
138
Octane rating
Minimum octane
G028920
Typical pump octane label
Volvo recommends premium fuel for best per-
formance, but using 87 octane or above will not
affect engine reliability.
Volvo engines are designed to achieve rated
horsepower, torque, and fuel economy per-
formance using premium 91 octane fuel.
Demanding driving
In demanding driving conditions, such as oper-
ating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer,
or driving for extended periods at higher alti-
tudes than normal, it may be advisable to
switch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or to
change gasoline brands to fully utilize your
engine's capacity, and for the smoothest pos-
sible operation.
NOTE
When switching to higher octane fuel or
changing gasoline brands, it may be neces-
sary to fill the tank more than once before a
difference in engine operation is noticeable.
Fuel Formulations
Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a
knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives.
Besides damaging the exhaust emission con-
trol systems on your vehicle, lead has been
strongly linked to certain forms of cancer.
Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.
Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to
certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area
where you must fill your own gas tank, take
precautions. These may include:
•
standing upwind away from the filler nozzle
while refueling
•
refueling only at gas stations with vapor
recovery systems that fully seal the mouth
of the filler neck during refueling
•
wearing neoprene gloves while handling a
fuel filler nozzle.
Use of Additives
With the exception of gas line antifreeze during
winter months, do not add solvents, thicken-
ers, or other store-bought additives to your
vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems.
Overuse may damage your engine, and some
of these additives contain organically volatile
chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself
to these chemicals.
WARNING
Never carry a cell phone that is switched
on while refueling your vehicle. If the phone
rings, this may cause a spark that could
ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire and
injury.
WARNING
Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless,
and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust
gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes
inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger
compartment is ventilated, and immediately
return the vehicle to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for correction.
06 Starting and driving
Fuel requirements
06
``
139
Deposit control gasoline (detergent
additives)
Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas-
oline to control engine deposits. Detergent
gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and
intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit
control gasolines will help ensure good driva-
bility and fuel economy. If you are not sure
whether the gasoline contains deposit control
additives, check with the service station oper-
ator.
NOTE
Volvo does not recommend the use of
store-bought fuel injector cleaning addi-
tives.
Unleaded fuel
Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter
and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and
Canadian regulations require that pumps deliv-
ering unleaded gasoline be labelled "UNLEA-
DED". Only these pumps have nozzles which
fit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dis-
pense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled
"unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasoline
damages the three-way catalytic converter and
the heated oxygen sensor system. Repeated
use of leaded gasoline will lessen the effec-
tiveness of the emission control system and
could result in loss of emission warranty cov-
erage. State and local vehicle inspection pro-
grams will make detection of misfueling easier,
possibly resulting in emission test failure for
misfueled vehicles.
NOTE
Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain
an octane enhancing additive called methyl-
cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission
Control System performance may be affec-
ted, and the Check Engine Light (malfunc-
tion indicator lamp) located on your instru-
ment panel may light. If this occurs, please
return your vehicle to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for maintenance.
Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing
"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or
ethers. In some areas, state or local laws
require that the service pump be marked indi-
cating use of alcohols or ethers. However,
there are areas in which the pumps are
unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is
alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, check
with the service station operator. To meet sea-
sonal air quality standards, some areas require
the use of "oxygenated" fuel. Volvo allows the
use of the following "oxygenated" fuels; how-
ever, the octane ratings listed on this page
must still be met. Alcohol – Ethanol: Fuels
containing up to 10% ethanol by volume may
be used. Ethanol may also be referred to as
Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol". Ethers – MTBE:
Fuels containing up to 15% MTBE may be
used.
Fuel filler door
Press the button on the light switch panel (see
the illustration on page 63) with the ignition
switched off to unlock the fuel filler door.
Please note that the fuel filler door will remain
unlocked until the vehicle begins to move for-
ward. An audible click will be heard when the
fuel filler door relocks.
If you intend to leave your vehicle while it is
being refueled, this feature enables you to lock
the doors/liftgate while leaving the fuel filler
door unlocked.
You can also keep the vehicle locked if you
remain inside it during refueling. The central
locking button does not lock the fuel filler door.
Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed and
is completely closed after refueling. Open the
fuel filler cap slowly during hot weather.
06 Starting and driving
Fuel requirements
06
140
Refueling
The fuel tank is designed to accommodate
possible expansion of the fuel in hot weather,
see page 257 for fuel tank volume. Be aware
that the "usable" tank capacity will be some-
what less than the specified maximum. When
the fuel level is low, such factors as ambient
temperature, the fuel's "Reid vapor pressure"
characteristics, and terrain can affect the fuel
pump's ability to supply the engine with an
adequate supply of fuel. Therefore, it is advis-
able to refuel as soon as possible when the
needle nears the red zone, or when the fuel
warning light comes on.
CAUTION
•
Do not refuel with the engine running
1
.
Turn the ignition off or to position I. If the
ignition is on, an incorrect reading could
occur in the fuel gauge
•
After refueling, close the fuel filler cap
by turning it clockwise until it clicks into
place.
•
Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not
press the handle on the filler nozzle
more than one extra time. Too much
fuel in the tank in hot weather conditions
can cause the fuel to overflow. Overfill-
ing could also cause damage to the
emission control systems.
•
Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling.
In addition to causing damage to the
environment, gasolines containing
alcohol can cause damage to painted
surfaces, which may not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
•
Do not use gasolines containing meth-
anol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol).
This practice can result in vehicle per-
formance deterioration and can dam-
age critical parts in the fuel system.
Such damage may not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
1
If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle’s
performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.
06 Starting and driving
Ignition switch
06
141
Ignition switch positions
0 – Locked position
Remove the key to lock the
steering wheel
1
. Never turn
the key to position 0 while
driving or when the vehicle is
being towed.
NOTE
A ticking sound may be audible if the key is
turned to a position between 0 and I. To
stop this sound, turn the key to position II
and back to position 0.
I – Intermediate position
2
Certain accessories, radio,
etc. on, daytime running lights
off.
II – Drive position
The key's position when driv-
ing. The vehicle's entire elec-
trical system is activated.
III – Start position
Turn the key to this position
and release it immediately.
The key returns automatically
to the Drive position.
A chime will sound if the key
is left in the ignition and the
driver's door is opened (does not apply to vehi-
cles with the optional keyless drive).
1
Automatic transmission: the gear selector must be in the Park position. The optional keyless drive start control does not need to be removed.
2
Please be aware that leaving the key in this positions I or II will increase battery drain.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the vehicle
06
142
To start the engine
WARNING
Before starting, check that the seat, steering
wheel and mirrors are adjusted properly.
Make sure the brake pedal can be
depressed completely. Adjust the seat if
necessary.
1. Fasten the seat belt.
2. Apply the parking brake if not already set.
The gear selector should be locked in the
Park (P) position (Shiftlock). See also page
148.
Manual transmission: The clutch must be
fully depressed.
NOTE
After a cold start, idle speed may be notice-
ably higher than normal for a short period.
This is done to help bring components in the
emission control system to their normal
operating temperature as quickly as possi-
ble, which enables them to control emis-
sions and help reduce the vehicle's impact
on the environment.
3. The vehicle is equipped with an autostart
feature. Without touching the throttle
pedal, turn the key to position III and
release it. The starter motor will then oper-
ate automatically (for up to ten seconds)
until the engine starts. If the engine fails to
start, repeat this step.
4. To release the gear selector from the Park
(P) position, the engine must be running (or
the ignition key must be in position II) and
the brake pedal must be depressed.
5. Select the desired gear. On models with an
automatic transmission, the gear engages
after a very slight delay which is especially
noticeable when selecting R.
NOTE
•
Immobilizer: If two of the keys to your
vehicle are close together, e.g., on the
same key ring when you try to start the
vehicle, this could cause interference in
the immobilizer system and result in the
vehicle not starting. If this should occur,
remove one of the keys from the key
ring before trying to start the vehicle
again.
•
Keylock: Models equipped an auto-
matic transmission have a keylock sys-
tem. When the engine is switched off,
the gear selector must be in the Park
(P) position before the key can be
removed from the ignition switch
1
.
•
When starting in cold weather, the
transmission may shift up at slightly
higher engine speeds than normal until
the automatic transmission fluid rea-
ches normal operating temperature.
•
Do not race a cold engine immediately
after starting. Oil flow may not reach
some lubrication points fast enough to
prevent engine damage.
1
The optional keyless drive start control does not need to be removed from the ignition switch.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the vehicle
06
143
WARNING
Volvo's floor mats are specially manufac-
tured for your car. They must be firmly
secured in the clips on the floor so that they
cannot slide and become trapped under the
pedals on the driver's side.
•
Always place the gear selector in Park
(P) (manual transmission: first or reverse
gear) and apply the parking brake
before leaving the vehicle.and apply the
parking brake before leaving the vehi-
cle. Never leave the vehicle unattended
with the engine running.
•
Always open garage doors fully before
starting the engine inside a garage to
ensure adequate ventilation. The
exhaust gases contain carbon monox-
ide, which is invisible and odorless but
very poisonous.
CAUTION
Automatic transmission: The engine
should be idling when you move the gear
selector. Never accelerate until after you
feel the transmission engage! Accelerating
immediately after selecting a gear will cause
harsh engagement and premature trans-
mission wear. Selecting P or N when idling
at a standstill for prolonged periods of time
will help prevent overheating of the auto-
matic transmission fluid.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the vehicle with keyless drive (option as available)
06
144
Starting a vehicle with keyless drive
G019410
Starting a vehicle with keyless drive
Keyless drive makes it possible to unlock, start
and lock the vehicle without using a remote
control.
A start control is fitted in the ignition switch on
vehicles equipped with the optional keyless
drive. This control is used in the same way as
the ignition key to start the engine. See also
page 142 for general information on starting
the engine.
NOTE
A keyless drive remote control must be
inside the vehicle in order to start the
engine.
1. Press the brake pedal (the clutch pedal
must also be fully depressed on models
with a manual transmission).
2. Press in the keyless drive start control and
turn it to position III.
NOTE
The vehicle is equipped with an autostart
function that makes it possible to start the
engine without holding the start control in
position III. Turn the start control to position
III and release it. The starter motor will then
operate automatically (for up to ten sec-
onds) until the engine starts.
Starting the vehicle with the ignition key
(remote control)
A vehicle with keyless drive can also be started
with the ignition key (if, for example, the battery
in the keyless drive remote control is weak). To
do so:
G019420
Removing the keyless drive start control
1. Press the catch on the side of the start
control (see the illustration).
2. Pull the keyless drive start control out of
the ignition switch.
3. Insert the remote control into the ignition
switch and turn it to position III to start the
engine. See also page 142 for complete
starting information.
06 Starting and driving
Manual transmission, 6-speed (certain markets only)
06
145
6-speed manual transmission (option
on certain models)
G018258
Depress the clutch pedal completely when
changing gears
1
.
Remove your foot from the clutch pedal while
driving. The shift pattern should be followed.
Overdrive (5th and 6th gears) should be used
as often as possible to help improve fuel econ-
omy.
Engaging reverse gear, 6-speed
transmission
G018259
Reverse gear should only be engaged from a
complete stop.
NOTE
Reverse gear is electronically blocked to
help prevent it from being selected while the
vehicle is moving foward.
CAUTION
Never shift into reverse while moving for-
ward.
WARNING
An extra mat on the driver's floor can cause
the accelerator, brake, and/or clutch pedal
to catch. Check that the movement of these
pedals is not impeded. Not more than one
protective floor covering may be used at
one time.
1
Clutch interlock: The clutch must be fully depressed before you can start your car. If the clutch is notdepressed, it will not be possible to start the engine.
06 Starting and driving
Automatic transmission (option)
06
146
Shiftgate positions
G020237
Depress the button on the front of the gear
selector knob to move the selector between
the R, N, D, and P positions.
The gear selector can be moved freely between
the Geartronic (manual shifting) and Drive (D)
positions while driving.
Gear selector positions
P – Park
Select the P position when starting or parking.
In P, the transmission is mechanically blocked
(Shiftlock). Always apply the parking brake
when parking.
G018264
D - left position: automatic shifting, M - right posi-
tion: manual shifting
CAUTION
The car must be stationary when selecting
position P.
R – Reverse
The car must be stationary when shifting to
position R.
N – Neutral
N is the neutral position. The engine can be
started, but no gear is selected. Apply the park-
ing brake when the car is stationary with the
gear selector in N.
NOTE
If the gear selector is in the Neutral position
and the vehicle has been at a standstill for
at least 3 seconds, the brake pedal must be
pressed before the gear selector can be
moved to another position.
In order to move the gear selector to another
position:
1.
Turn the ignition key to position II (if the
engine is not already running).
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Move the gear selector to the desired posi-
tion.
D – Drive
D is the normal driving position. The Drive posi-
tion offers 5 forward gears
1
. The car automat-
ically shifts between the various forward gears,
1
T5 models have 6 forward gears.
06 Starting and driving
Automatic transmission (option)
06
147
based on the level of acceleration and speed.
The car must be at a standstill when shifting to
position D from position R.
Manual shifting – Geartronic
The manual shifting mode (Geartronic) can be
selected at any time to manually select forward
gears, including while the car is moving.
NOTE
Reverse, Neutral, and Park cannot be
selected in Geartronic mode.
•
To access the Manual (M) shifting position
from Drive (D), move the gear selector to
the right to M.
•
To return to the Drive (D) position from M,
move the gear selector to the left.
While driving
•
If you select the M position while driving,
the gear that was being used in the Drive
position will also initially be selected in the
M position.
•
Move the gear selector forward (toward
"+") to shift to a higher gear or rearward
(toward "–") to shift to a lower gear.
•
If you hold the gear selector toward "–", the
transmission will downshift one gear at a
time and will utilize the braking power of
the engine. If the current speed is too high
for using a lower gear, the downshift will
not occur until the speed has decreased
enough to allow the lower gear to be used.
•
If you slow to a very low speed, the trans-
mission will automatically shift down.
Cold starts (turbo engines)
When driving before the engine has reached its
normal operating temperature, the transmis-
sion will shift up at slightly higher engine
speeds to heat the three-way catalytic con-
verter as quickly as possible.
Kickdown
Automatic shift to a lower gear (kickdown) is
achieved by depressing the accelerator pedal
fully and briskly. An upshift will occur when
approaching the top speed for a particular gear
or by releasing the accelerator pedal slightly.
Kickdown can be used for maximum acceler-
ation or when passing at highway speeds.
Safety function
To help prevent excessive engine speeds (rpm)
that could lead to engine damage, the engine
management system includes a function that
prevents kickdown from taking place if the
engine speed is too high.
Kickdown will not occur if the driver attempts
to use this function when engine speeds are
too high. The transmission will remain in the
currently selected gear.
06 Starting and driving
Shiftlock override
06
148
Overriding the shiftlock system
G018263
Shiftlock prevents the gear selector from being
moved out of Park unless the ignition key is in
position II and the brake pedal is depressed.
In certain cases it may be necessary to move
the gear selector from the Park position man-
ually.
To manually override the Shiftlock
system:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3.
There is a small cover below P-R-N-D on
the gear selector panel. Open the rear edge
of the panel.
4. Insert the key blade, see page 120, into the
opening and press it down until it bottoms.
5. With the key blade pressed down, move
the gear selector out of the P position.
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
06
``
149
Brake circuit malfunction
The brake system is a hydraulic system con-
sisting of two separate brake circuits. If a prob-
lem should occur in one of these circuits, it is
still possible to stop the vehicle with the other
brake circuit.
If the brake pedal must be depressed farther
than normal and requires greater foot pressure,
the stopping distance will be longer.
A warning light in the instrument panel will light
up to warn the driver that a fault has occurred.
If this light comes on while driving or braking,
stop immediately and check the brake fluid
level in the reservoir.
NOTE
Press the brake pedal hard and maintain
pressure on the pedal – do not pump the
brakes.
WARNING
If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the
reservoir or if a brake system message is
shown in the information display, DO NOT
DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a Volvo
retailer and have the brake system inspec-
ted.
Power brakes function only when the
engine is running
The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure
which is only created when the engine is run-
ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with the
engine switched off.
If the power brakes are not working, the brake
pedal must be pressed approximately five
times harder than usual to make up for the lack
of power assistance. This can happen for
example when towing your vehicle or if the
engine is switched off when the vehicle is roll-
ing. The brake pedal feels harder than usual.
Water on brake discs and brake pads
affects braking
Driving in rain and slush or passing through an
automatic car wash can cause water to collect
on the brake discs and pads. This will cause a
delay in braking effect when the pedal is
depressed. To avoid such a delay when the
brakes are needed, depress the pedal occa-
sionally when driving through rain, slush, etc.
This will remove the water from the brakes.
Check that brake application feels normal. This
should also be done after washing or starting
in very damp or cold weather.
Severe strain on the brake system
The brakes will be subject to severe strain
when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or
when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually
slower, which means that the cooling of the
brakes is less efficient than when driving on
level roads. To reduce the strain on the brakes,
shift into a lower gear and let the engine help
with the braking. Do not forget that if you are
towing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected to
a greater than normal load.
Anti-lock brakes (ABS)
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) helps to
improve vehicle control (stopping and steering)
during severe braking conditions by limiting
brake lockup. When the system "senses"
impending lockup, braking pressure is auto-
matically modulated in order to help prevent
lockup that could lead to a skid.
The system performs a self-diagnostic test
when the engine is started and when the
vehicle first reaches a speed of approxi-
mately 12 mph (20 km/h). The brake pedal will
pulsate several times and a sound may be
audible from the ABS control module. This is
normal.
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
06
150
For optimal ABS braking effect:
1. Press down on the brake pedal with full
force. The pedal will pulsate.
2. Steer the vehicle in the direction of travel
and keep the brake pedal depressed.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD)
EBD is an integrated part of the ABS system.
EBD regulates the hydraulic pressure to the
rear brakes to help provide optimal braking
capacity.
The switching of the ABS modulator will be
audible and the brake pedal will pulsate during
braking. Please be aware that ABS does not
increase the absolute braking potential of the
vehicle. While control will be enhanced, ABS
will not shorten stopping distances on slippery
surfaces.
If the warning lamp lights up there is a mal-
function of the ABS system (the standard brak-
ing system will still function) and the vehicle
should be driven cautiously to a trained and
qualified Volvo service technicianfor inspec-
tion.
WARNING
If the BRAKES and ABS warning symbols
light at the same time, there may be a prob-
lem in the brake system. If the brake fluid
level is normal in these circumstances, drive
carefully to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician to have the brake system
checked.
Emergency Brake Assistance – EBA
EBA is designed to provide full brake effect
immediately in the event of sudden, hard brak-
ing. The system is activated by the speed with
which the brake pedal is depressed.
When the EBA system is activated, the brake
pedal will go down and pressure in the brake
system immediately increases to the maximum
level. Maintain full pressure on the brake pedal
in order to utilize the system completely. EBA
is automatically deactivated when the brake
pedal is released.
NOTE
•
When the EBA system is activated, the
brake pedal will go down and pressure
in the brake system immediately increa-
ses to the maximum level. You must
maintain full pressure on the brake
pedal in order to utilize the system com-
pletely. There will be no braking effect if
the pedal is released. EBA is automati-
cally deactivated when the brake pedal
is released.
•
When the vehicle has been parked for
some time, the brake pedal may sink
more than usual when the engine is
started. This is normal and the pedal will
return to its usual position when it is
released.
06 Starting and driving
Stability system
06
``
151
Dynamic Stability Traction Control
(DSTC)
The stability system consists of a number of
functions designed help reduce wheel spin,
counteract skidding, and to generally help
improve directional stability.
A pulsating sound will be audible when the
system is actively operating and is normal.
Traction control – TC
This function is designed to help reduce wheel
spin by transferring power from a drive wheel
that begins to lose traction to the wheel on the
opposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle).
TC is most active at low speeds.
This is one of the stability system's permanent
functions and cannot be switched off.
G020349
A - thumb wheel, B - RESET button
Spin control (SC)
The spin control function is designed to help
prevent the drive wheels from spinning while
the vehicle is accelerating.
Under certain circumstances, such as when
driving with snow chains, or driving in deep
snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to
temporarily switch off this function for maxi-
mum tractive force.
Temporarily switching off Spin control
1. Turn the thumbwheel (A) on the left-side
steering wheel lever until the
DSTC menu
is displayed.
2.
Hold down the RESET button (B) to toggle
between DSTC SPIN CONTROL ON or
OFF.
NOTE
•
The message DSTC SPIN CONTROL
OFF
indicates that the stability sys-
tem's spin control function has tempo-
rarily been switched off.
•
The stability control indicator light
will illuminate and remain on until spin
control has been reactivated.
•
The spin control function is automati-
cally enabled each time the engine is
started.
•
DSTC ON indicates that all system
functions are active.
Active yaw control – AYC (DSTC only)
This function helps maintain directional stabil-
ity, for example when cornering, by braking
one or more of the wheels if the vehicle shows
a tendency to skid or slide laterally.
This is one of the stability system's permanent
functions and cannot be switched off.
06 Starting and driving
Stability system
06
152
WARNING
The car's handling and stability characteris-
tics will be altered if the DSTC system func-
tions have been disabled.
DSTC-related messages in the text
window
•
"TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY
OFF
" – The system has been temporarily
switched off due to high brake temperature
and will automatically switch on again
when the brakes have cooled.
•
"ANTI SKID SERVICE REQUIRED" – the
system has been automatically disen-
gaged due to a fault. A trained and qualified
Volvo service technician retailer should
check the system.
Symbols used by the stability system
Stability system indicator light
Information symbol
If the and symbols light up at the same
time, read the message in the display.
If only the
symbol lights up, this indicates
one of the following situations:
•
The light illuminates for approximately
2 seconds to indicate that the system is
performing a self-diagnostic test when the
engine is started.
•
If the light flashes while driving, this indi-
cates that the stability system is actively
functioning to help counteract wheel spin
and/or a skid.
•
If this light stays on after the engine has
started or comes on while driving, there
may be a fault in the stability system. Con-
sult a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
•
If Spin control has been intentionally
switched off, a message is displayed and
the light will stay on as a reminder that this
function has been disabled by the driver.
WARNING
The stability system is intended to help
improve driving safety. It supplements, but
can never replace, the driver's judgement
and responsibility when operating the vehi-
cle. Speed and driving style should always
be adapted to traffic and road conditions.
06 Starting and driving
Towing
06
``
153
Emergency towing
3
G007607
The towing eyelet is located under the floor of
the cargo area. This eyelet must be screwed
into the positions provided on the right sides of
either the front or rear bumper (see the illustra-
tion).
To attach the towing eyelet:
1. Press the mark on the lower edge of the
cover (1) to open it.
2. Screw the towing eyelet in place first by
hand and then using the tire iron until it is
securely in place.
After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet
should be removed and returned to its storage
space. Press the cover back into position.
WARNING
Do not use the towing eyelets to pull the
vehicle up onto a flat bed tow truck.
Towing a vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground
WARNING
Volvo does not recommend towing a disa-
bled vehicle behind another vehicle. Signif-
icant difficulty in steering and braking,
combined with unfavorable weather, traffic,
and road conditions may make it impossible
to maintain vehicle control.
1. Apply the parking brake.
WARNING
Towing a vehicle with a locked steering
wheel will make the vehicle impossible to
steer.
2. Insert the key into the ignition to unlock the
steering wheel. The steering wheel must be
unlocked. With the engine off and the vehi-
cle at a standstill, great effort will be
required to turn the steering wheel.
3.
Turn the ignition key to position II.
4. Place the gear selector in neutral. For vehi-
cles with automatic transmissions, follow
instruction on page 148, "Shiftlock over-
ride" to allow the gear selector to be moved
from the Park position.
5. Keep firm pressure on the brake pedal
while releasing the parking brake.
6. When towing has been completed, return
the gear selector to Park (automatic) or
Reverse (manual) and apply the parking
brake.
The following points should also be
observed:
•
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). Never
exceed local towing speed limits and heed
all local towing restrictions.
•
Never tow farther than 50 miles (80 km).
•
Keep the tow rope taut at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
•
The disabled vehicle should be towed in
the forward direction only.
06 Starting and driving
Towing
06
154
WARNING
•
Never allow a vehicle to be towed with-
out a driver behind the wheel of the
disabled vehicle.
•
Never remove the key from the ignition
while the vehicle is moving. The steering
wheel could lock, making it impossible
to steer the vehicle.
•
When the engine is not running, steering
resistance and the effort needed to
apply the brakes will be great.
•
Never attempt to tow a vehicle with a
dead battery at night.
CAUTION
•
Check with state and local authorities
before attempting this type of towing,
as vehicles being towed are subject to
regulations regarding maximum towing
speed, length and type of towing
device, lighting, marker flags, etc.
•
Never attempt to push- or tow-start a
vehicle with a dead battery. This would
inject unburned fuel into the three-way
catalytic converter(s), causing over-
heating, backfiring, and damage, see
page 155 for instructions on jump star-
ting the vehicle.
Towing vehicles with front wheel drive
Volvo recommends the use of flat bed equip-
ment for towing vehicles with front wheel drive.
If wheel lift equipment must be used, please
use extreme caution to help avoid damage to
the vehicle.
In this case, the vehicle should be towed with
the rear wheels on the ground if at all possible.
If it is absolutely necessary to tow the vehicle
with the front wheels on the ground, please
refer to the towing information on the previous
page.
•
Sling-type equipment applied at the front
will damage radiator and air conditioning
lines.
•
It is equally important not to use sling-type
equipment at the rear or apply lifting equip-
ment inside the rear wheels; serious dam-
age to the rear axle may result.
•
If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed
truck, the towing eyelets must not be used
to secure the vehicle on the flat bed. Con-
sult the tow truck operator.
WARNING
•
Remember that the power brakes and
power steering will not function when
engine is not running. The braking and
steering systems will function but the
brake pedal pressure required is
3 – 5 times above normal and greater
steering effort must be exerted.
•
The towing eyelets must not be used for
pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or for
any similar purpose involving severe
strain. Do not use the towing eyelets to
pull the vehicle up onto a flat bed tow
truck.
06 Starting and driving
Jump starting
06
155
G020298
Follow these instructions to jump start your
vehicle's dead battery or to jump start another
vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle. If the
12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in another
vehicle, check that the vehicles are not touch-
ing to prevent premature completion of a cir-
cuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instruc-
tions provided for the other vehicle.
To jump start your vehicle:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. First connect the auxiliary battery positive
(+) terminal (1) to the positive (+) terminal in
your vehicle's battery (2), marked with a
"+" sign.
3. Connect the auxiliary battery's negative (–)
terminal (3) to the ground point in your
vehicle's engine compartment near the
driver's side spring strut (4).
4. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle,
then start the engine in the vehicle with
dead battery.
5. After the engine has started, first remove
the negative (–) terminal jumper cable.
Then remove the positive (+) terminal
jumper cable.
WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the state of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
WARNING
Do not connect the jumper cable to any part
of the fuel system or to any moving parts.
Avoid touching hot manifolds.
•
Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which
is flammable and explosive.
•
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,
skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con-
tact occurs, flush the affected area
immediately with water. Obtain medical
help immediately if eyes are affected.
•
Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark.
•
Do not smoke near the battery.
•
Failure to follow the instructions for
jump starting can lead to personal
injury.
•
Do not touch the jumper cables during
the attempt to start the vehicle. This
could cause sparks.
06 Starting and driving
Transporting loads
06
156
Loading the vehicle
Your vehicle's load-carrying capacity is affec-
ted by factors such as:
•
the number of passengers
•
tire inflation
•
the amount of optional or accessory equip-
ment installed
•
the amount of cargo.
See the chapter "Wheels and tires" for more
detailed information.
Before loading the car, turn off the engine, and
apply the parking brake when loading or
unloading long objects. The gear selector can
be inadvertently knocked out of position by
long cargo, causing the car to move.
Keep the following in mind when
loading the vehicle:
•
Load objects in the cargo area against the
rear seat backrest.
•
Load heavy cargo as low as possible.
•
Center wide loads.
•
Secure all cargo with restraining straps
anchored to the load securing eyelets.
•
Cover sharp edges on the load.
•
The rear seats can be folded down to
extend the cargo compartment, see
page 111.
WARNING
•
Remember that an object weighing
44 lbs (20 kg) produces a force of
2,200 lbs (1,000 kg) in a head-on colli-
sion at 30 mph (50 km/h)!
•
When the rear backrest(s) are folded
down, the vehicle should not be loaded
to a level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below
the upper edge of the rear side win-
dows. Objects placed higher than this
level could impede the function of the
Volvo Inflatable Curtain.
Load carriers (accessory)
Load carriers are available as Volvo accesso-
ries. Follow the installation instructions sup-
plied with the load carriers.
Observe the following points when using load
carriers:
•
To avoid damaging your car and to achieve
maximum safety when driving, we recom-
mend using the load carriers that Volvo has
developed especially for your car.
•
Volvo-approved removable roof racks are
designed to carry the maximum allowable
roof load for this vehicle: 165 lbs (75 kg).
For Non-Volvo roof racks, check the man-
ufacturer's weight limits for the rack.
•
Never exceed the rack manufacturer's
weigh limits and never exceed the maxi-
mum rated roof load of 165 lbs (75 kg).
•
Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads
evenly.
•
Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the
load.
•
Secure the cargo correctly with appropri-
ate tie-down equipment.
•
Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured.
•
Remember that the car's center of gravity
and handling change when you carry a
load on the roof.
•
The car's wind resistance and fuel con-
sumption will increase with the size of the
load.
•
Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast
cornering and hard braking.
06 Starting and driving
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)–option
06
``
157
Introduction
G020295
BLIS camera
Indicator light
BLIS symbol
The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an
information system that indicates the presence
of another vehicle moving in the same direction
as your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blind
area".
CAUTION
The BLIS system should only be repaired by
a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-
nician.
WARNING
•
BLIS is an information system, NOT a
warning or safety system.
•
BLIS does not eliminate the need for
you to visually confirm the conditions
around you, and the need for you to turn
your head and shoulders to make sure
that you can safely change lanes.
•
As the driver, you have full responsibility
for changing lanes in a safe manner.
The system is based on digital camera tech-
nology. The cameras (1) are located beneath
the side-view mirrors.
When one (or both) of the cameras have
detected a vehicle in the blind area (up to
approximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side of
your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft.
(9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), the
indicator light in the door panel (2) illuminates.
The light will glow continuously to alert the
driver of the vehicle in the blind area.
NOTE
The door panel indicator light illuminates on
the side of the vehicle where the system has
detected another vehicle. If your vehicle is
passed on both sides at the same time, both
lights will illuminate.
A
B
G020296
A = approx. 10 ft. (3 meters), B = approx. 31 ft.
(9.5 meters)
BLIS has an integrated function that alerts the
driver if a fault should occur with the system.
For example, if one or both of the system's
cameras are obscured, a message (see the
table on page 160) will appear in the informa-
tion display in the instrument panel. If this
occurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary,
the system can be temporarily switched off (for
instructions see page 159).
06 Starting and driving
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)–option
06
158
When does BLIS function
The system functions when your vehicle is
moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).
When you pass another vehicle:
The system reacts when you pass another
vehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h)
faster than that vehicle.
When you are passed by another vehicle:
The system reacts if your vehicle is passed by
another vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph
(70 km/h) faster than your vehicle.
WARNING
•
BLIS does not function in sharp curves.
•
BLIS does not function when your vehi-
cle is backing up.
•
If you are towing a wide trailer, this may
prevent the BLIS cameras from detect-
ing other vehicles in adjacent lanes.
How BLIS functions in daylight and
darkness
Daylight
BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehi-
cles. The system is designed to help detect
motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses,
motorcycles, etc.
Darkness
BLIS reacts to the headlights of surrounding
vehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a
vehicle in the blind area must have its head-
lights on. This means, for example, that the
system will not detect a trailer without head-
lights that is being towed behind a car or truck.
WARNING
•
BLIS does not react to cyclists or
mopeds.
•
BLIS does not react to vehicles that are
standing still.
•
The function of the BLIS cameras may
be affected by intense light, or when
driving at night in areas where there are
no external sources of light (e.g., street
lights, other vehicles, etc.). In such
cases, the system may react as if the
cameras were obscured.
•
In both of the above mentioned condi-
tions, a message will appear in the infor-
mation display.
•
When driving in such conditions, the
system's function will be limited or it
may be temporarily switched off, see
page 159 for instructions.
•
When the message is no longer dis-
played, BLIS will return to normal func-
tion.
•
The BLIS cameras have the same limi-
tation as the human eye. In other words,
their "vision is impaired" by adverse
weather conditions such as heavy
snowfall, dense fog, etc.
06 Starting and driving
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)–option
06
``
159
Limitations
In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s)
may illuminate even when there are no other
vehicles in the area monitored by the system.
NOTE
If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occa-
sionally even when there are no other vehi-
cles in the blind area, this does not indicate
a fault in the system.
In the event of a fault,
Blind spot syst.
service required
will be displayed.
The following are several examples of situa-
tions in which the BLIS indicator light(s) may
illuminate even when there are no other vehi-
cles in the area monitored by the system.
G018176
Light reflected from a wet road surface
G018177
The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light,
smooth surface such as barriers between lanes on
a highway
G018178
Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is low
on the horizon
Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses
In order to function optimally, the BLIS camera
lenses must be kept clean. They can be wiped
clean with a soft cloth or wet sponge.
CAUTION
•
Clean the lenses carefully to avoid
scratching.
•
The lenses are electrically heated to
help melt ice or snow. If necessary, gen-
tly brush away snow from the lenses.
Switching BLIS on and off
G018270
BLIS button (left button in the illustration)
BLIS is automatically activated when the igni-
tion is switched on. The indicator lights will
provide confirmation by flashing 3 times.
•
The system can be switched off by press-
ing the BLIS button in the center console.
The indicator light in the button goes out
06 Starting and driving
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)–option
06
160
when the system is switched off, and a text
message is displayed.
•
BLIS can be switched on again by pressing
the button. The indicator light in the button
will illuminate and a new text message will
be displayed. Press the READ button, see
page 60, to erase the message.
BLIS system messages
Text in the
display
System status
BLIS service
required
BLIS not functioning
properly. Contact an
authorized Volvo serv-
ice technician.
BLIS camera
blocked
BLIS camera obscured.
Clean the lenses.
BLIS ON
BLIS system on
BLIS OFF
BLIS system off
BLIS reduced
function
The BLIS cameras'
function has been
reduced by e.g., fog, or
strong sunlight directly
into the camera. The
camera will reset itself
when these conditions
have changed. have
been function reduced
06 Starting and driving
Park assist (Option/accessory)
06
``
161
Introduction
G020294
Front/rear park assist
The park assist system is designed to assist
you when driving into parking spaces, garages,
etc. It utilizes four ultrasound sensors located
in one or both bumpers to measure the dis-
tance to a vehicle, object or a person who may
be close to the front or rear of your vehicle.
Park assist is available in two versions:
•
Rear bumper only
•
Front and rear bumpers
WARNING
Park Assist is an information system, NOT a
safety system. This system is designed to
be a supplementary aid when parking the
vehicle. It is not, however, intended to
replace the driver's attention and judge-
ment.
Function
The system is activated automatically when the
vehicle is started. The indicator light in the but-
ton in the center console illuminates.
•
The front park assist system is active from
the time the engine is started until the vehi-
cle exceeds a speed of approximately
10 mph (15 km/h). It is also active when the
vehicle is backing up.
•
Rear park assist is active when the engine
is running and reverse gear has been
selected.
Rear park assist
The distance monitored behind the vehicle is
approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The signal comes
from the rear speakers.
The system must be deactivated when towing
a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted
carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park
assist system's sensors.
NOTE
Rear park assist is deactivated automati-
cally when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine
trailer wiring is used.
Front park assist
The distance monitored in front of the vehicle
is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible sig-
nal comes from the audio system's front
speakers.
It may not be possible to combine auxiliary
headlights and front park assist since these
lights could trigger the system's sensors.
06 Starting and driving
Park assist (Option/accessory)
06
162
Activating/deactivating park assist
G021267
Park Assist button (lright button in the illustration)
The system is activated automatically when the
vehicle is started.
•
Press the Park assist button on the center
console to temporarily deactivate the sys-
tem(s). The indicator light in the button will
go out when the system has been deacti-
vated.
•
Park assist will be automatically reactiva-
ted the next time the engine is started, or if
the button is pressed (the indicator light in
the button will illuminate).
NOTE
•
Front park assist is disengaged auto-
matically when the parking brake is
applied.
•
If the vehicle is equipped with front and
rear park assist, both systems will be
deactivated by pressing the button.
Audible signals from the park assist
system
The Park Assist system uses an intermittent
tone that pulses faster as you come close to an
object, and becomes constant when you are
within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object
in front of or behind the vehicle. If the volume
of another source from the audio system is
high, this will be automatically lowered.
If there are objects within this distance both
behind and in front of the vehicle, the signal
alternates between front and rear speakers.
Faults in the system
If the information symbol illumi-
nates and
PARK ASSIST
SERVICE REQUIRED
is shown
on the information display, this
indicates that the system is not
functioning properly and has been disengaged.
Consult a Volvo retailer or authorized Volvo
service technician.
CAUTION
In certain circumstances, the park assist
system may give unexpected warning sig-
nals that can be caused by external sound
sources that use the same ultrasound fre-
quencies as the system. This may include
such things as the horns of other vehicles,
wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,
motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does
not indicate a fault in the system.
06 Starting and driving
Park assist (Option/accessory)
06
163
Cleaning the sensors
G007601
Park assist sensors
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and a suitable car washing deter-
gent.
Ice and snow covering the sensors may cause
incorrect warning signals.
NOTE
If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt,
snow, or ice, this could result in false warn-
ing signals from the park assist system.
G020918
164
General information............................................................................... 166
Tire inflation........................................................................................... 168
Inflation pressure—U.S. models .......................................................... 170
Inflation pressure—Canadian models .................................................. 171
Tire designations................................................................................... 172
Glossary of tire terminology.................................................................. 174
Vehicle loading...................................................................................... 175
Uniform tire quality gradings................................................................. 176
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires................................................ 177
Temporary spare................................................................................... 178
Wheel nuts............................................................................................ 179
Tire rotation........................................................................................... 180
Changing a wheel................................................................................. 181
Tire Sealing System ............................................................................. 183
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............................................. 188
07
WHEELS AND TIRES
07 Wheels and tires
General information
07
166
Your vehicle is equipped with tires according
to the vehicle's tire information placard on the
B-pillar (the structural member at the side of
the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door
opening), or on the inside of the fuel filler door
on Canadian models.
CAUTION
Some Volvo models are equipped with an
Ultra High Performance tire and wheel com-
bination designed to provide maximum dry
pavement performance with consideration
for hydroplaning resistance. As such, they
may be more susceptible to road hazard
damage and, depending on driving condi-
tions, may achieve a tread life of less than
20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this vehi-
cle is equipped with Volvo’s advanced AWD
or DSTC system, these tires are not
designed for winter driving, and should be
replaced with winter tires when weather
conditions dictate.
The tires have good road holding characteris-
tics and offer good handling on dry and wet
surfaces. It should be noted however that the
tires have been developed to give these fea-
tures on snow/ice-free surfaces.
Certain models are equipped with "all-season"
tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree
of road holding on slippery surfaces than tires
without the "all-season" rating. However, for
optimum road holding on icy or snow-covered
roads, we recommend suitable winter tires on
all four wheels.
When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires
are the same size designation, type (radial) and
preferably from the same manufacturer, on all
four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering
the car's roadholding and handling characte-
ristics.
Storing wheels and tires
When storing complete wheels (tires mounted
on rims), they should be suspended off the
floor or placed on their sides on the floor.
Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on
their sides or standing upright, but should not
be suspended.
CAUTION
Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,
dry, dark place, and should never be stored
in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils,
etc.
WARNING
•
The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo
are specified to meet stringent stability
and handling requirements. Unap-
proved wheel/tire size combinations
can negatively affect your vehicle's sta-
bility and handling. Approved tire sizes
are shown in the Tire inflation pressure
tables, see page 170.
•
Any damage caused by installation of
unapproved wheel/tire size combina-
tions will not be covered by your new
vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no
responsibility for death, injury, or
expenses that may result from such
installations.
07 Wheels and tires
General information
07
167
Tread wear indicator
G020323
The tires have wear indicator strips running
across or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI
are printed on the side of the tire. When
approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the
tread, these strips become visible and indicate
that the tire should be replaced. Tires with less
than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor trac-
tion.
When replacing worn tires, it is recommended
that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size
as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the
same make (manufacturer) will prevent altera-
tion of the driving characteristics of the vehicle.
New Tires
Remember that tires are per-
ishable goods. As of 2000, the
manufacturing week and year
(Department of Transporta-
tion (DOT) stamp) will be indi-
cated with 4 digits (e.g. 1502
means that the tire illustrated
was manufactured during week 15 of 2002).
Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even when they are
not being used. It is recommended that tires
generally be replaced after 6 years of normal
service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent
high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V)
exposure can accelerate the aging process.
You should replace the spare tire when you
replace the other road tires due to the aging of
the spare.
A tire's age can be determined by the DOT
stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration).
A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration
should be replaced immediately.
Improving tire economy
•
Maintain correct tire pressure. For the tire
pressure tables, see page 170.
•
Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hard
braking and tire screeching.
•
Tire wear increases with speed.
•
Correct front wheel alignment is very
important.
•
Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy
and driving comfort.
•
Tires must maintain the same direction of
rotation throughout their lifetime.
•
When replacing tires, the tires with the
most tread should be mounted on the rear
wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer
during hard braking.
•
Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the
tires and/or wheels permanently.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire inflation
07
168
Inflation labels
G032513
Tire inflation placard on U.S. models
Check tire inflation pressure regularly.
Tables listing the recommended inflation pres-
sure for your vehicle can be found on page
170. A tire inflation pressure placard is also
located on the driver's side B-pillar (the struc-
tural member at the side of the vehicle, at the
rear of the driver's door opening). This placard
indicates the designation of the factory-moun-
ted tires on your vehicle, as well as load limits
and inflation pressure.
G032520
Tire inflation placard on Canadian models
NOTE
The placards shown indicate inflation pres-
sure for the tires installed on the car at the
factory only.
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pres-
sure, including the spare, at least once a month
and before long trips. You are strongly urged
to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as auto-
matic service station gauges may be inaccu-
rate.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure
for optimum tire performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
WARNING
•
Under-inflation is the most common
cause of tire failure and may result in
severe tire cracking, tread separation,
or "blowout," with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk of
injury.
•
Under-inflated tires reduce the load car-
rying capacity of your vehicle.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire
inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree
temperature drop causes a corresponding
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check
your tire pressures frequently and adjust them
to the proper pressure, which can be found on
the vehicle's tire information placard or certifi-
cation label.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire inflation
07
169
Checking tire pressure
Cold tires
Inflation pressure should be checked when the
tires are cold.
The tires are considered to be cold when
they have the same temperature as the sur-
rounding (ambient) air.
This temperature is normally reached after the
car has been parked for at least 3 hours.
After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile
(1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. If
you have to drive farther than this distance to
pump your tire(s), check and record the tire
pressure first and add the appropriate air pres-
sure when you get to the pump.
If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot,
never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires
are hot from driving and it is normal for pres-
sures to increase above recommended cold
pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended
cold inflation pressure could be significantly
under-inflated.
To check inflation pressure:
1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire,
then firmly press the tire gauge onto the
valve.
2. Add air to reach the recommended air
pressure
3. Replace the valve cap.
4. Repeat this procedure for each tire, includ-
ing the spare.
5. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there
are no nails or other objects embedded
that could puncture the tire and cause an
air leak.
6. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are
no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregular-
ities.
NOTE
•
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the center
of the valve. Then recheck the pressure
with your tire gauge.
•
Some spare tires require higher inflation
pressure than the other tires. Consult
the tire inflation tables, see page 170,
or see the inflation pressure placard.
Load ratings
The load ratings in the tables above translate
as follows:
91 = 1365 lbs (615 kg), 93 = 1433 lbs (650 kg),
99 = 1709 lbs (755 kg)
Speed ratings
The speed ratings in the tables translate as fol-
lows:
M = 81 mph (130 km/h), V= 149 mph (240 km/
h), W= 168 mph (270 km/h)
See also page 172 for an explanation of the
designations on the sidewall of the tire.
07 Wheels and tires
Inflation pressure—U.S. models
07
170
Tire inflation pressure table
The following tire pressures are recommended
by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire infla-
tion placard for information specific to the tires
installed on your vehicle at the factory.
Tire size Cold tire pressure up to four persons psi (kPa)
Front Rear
205/55R16 91V M+S 32 (220) 32 (220)
205/50R17 93V
Extra Load M+S
35 (240) 35 (240)
215/45R18
A
93W
Extra load
35 (240) 35 (240)
Temporary spare tire
T125/85R16 99M
61 (420) 61 (420)
A
Tires of this type may not be mounted on vehicles equipped with the optional self-leveling system.
07 Wheels and tires
Inflation pressure—Canadian models
07
171
Tire inflation pressure table
The following tire pressures are recommended
by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire infla-
tion placard for information specific to the tires
installed on your vehicle at the factory.
Tire size Cold tire pressures
Up to four persons
psi (kPa)
Optional pressure
Up to three persons
A
psi (kPa)
Front Rear Front Rear
205/55R16 91V M+S 36 (250) 36 (250) 30 (210) 30 (210)
205/50R17 93V Extra Load
M+S
36 (250) 36 (250) 35 (240) 32 (220)
215/45R18 93W Extra
load
B
36 (250) 36 (250) 35 (240) 32 (220)
Temporary spare tire
T125/85R16 99M
61 (420) 61 (420) 61 (420) 61 (420)
A
Optional pressure may not be used for homologation of fuel consumption or emissions.
B
Tires of this type may not be mounted on vehicles equipped with the optional self-leveling system.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire designations
07
172
Tire designations
1
2
3
4
5
6
12
11
10
8
7 9
G026442
Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers
place standardized information on the sidewall
of all tires (see the illustration).
The following information is listed on the tire
sidewall:
The tire designation (the following figures are
examples of a tire designation):
215: The width of the tire (in millimeters)
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The
larger the number, the wider the tire.
65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width.
R: Radial tire.
15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in
inches).
95: The tire's load index. In this example, a
load index of 95 equals a maximum load of
1521 lbs (690 kg).
H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum
speed at which the tire is designed to be
driven for extended periods of time, carry-
ing a permissible load for the vehicle, and
with correct inflation pressure. For exam-
ple, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph
(210 km/h).
NOTE
This information may not appear on the tire
because it is not required by law.
M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All
Terrain, AS = All Season
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
(TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT"
and indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or letters
are the plant code where it was manufac-
tured, the next two are the tire size code
and the last four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built. For exam-
ple, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week
of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are
marketing codes used at the manufactur-
er's discretion. This information helps a tire
manufacturer identify a tire for safety recall
purposes.
Tire Ply Composition and Material Used:
Indicates the number of plies indicates or
the number of layers of rubber-coated fab-
ric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire man-
ufacturers also must indicate the ply mate-
rials in the tire and the sidewall, which
include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire designations
07
173
Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum
load in pounds and kilograms that can be
carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire
information placard or the safety certifica-
tion label, located on the B-Pillar or the
driver's door or on the inside of the fuel filler
door on Canadian models, for the correct
tire pressure for your vehicle.
Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature
grades: See page 176 for more informa-
tion.
Maximum permissible inflation
pressure: The greatest amount of air pres-
sure that should ever be put in the tire. This
limit is set by the tire manufacturer.
The tire suppliers may have additional mark-
ings, notes or warnings such as standard load,
radial tubeless, etc.
07 Wheels and tires
Glossary of tire terminology
07
174
Terminology
•
Tire information placard: A placard
showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire
sizes, recommended inflation pressure,
and the maximum weight the vehicle can
carry.
•
Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num-
ber on the sidewall of each tire providing
information about the tire brand and man-
ufacturing plant, tire size and date of man-
ufacturer.
•
Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.
•
Standard load: A class of P-metric or Met-
ric tires designed to carry a maximum load
at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond
this pressure will not increase the tires load
carrying capability.
•
Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a heavier maximum
load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric
tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not increase the
tires load carrying capability.
•
kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres-
sure.
•
PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard
unit of air pressure.
•
B-pillar: The structural member at the side
of the vehicle behind the front door.
•
Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next
to the rim.
•
Sidewall of the tire: Area between the
bead area and the tread.
•
Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim-
eter of the tire that contacts the road when
mounted on the vehicle.
•
Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or
a tire and tube assembly upon which the
tire beads are seated.
•
Maximum load rating: a figure indicating
the maximum load in pounds and kilo-
grams that can be carried by the tire. This
rating is established by the tire manufac-
turer.
•
Maximum permissible inflation pres-
sure: the greatest amount of air pressure
that should ever be put in the tire. This limit
is set by the tire manufacturer.
•
Recommended tire inflation pressure:
inflation pressure, established by Volvo,
which is based on the type of tires that are
mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This
inflation pressure is affected by the number
of occupants in the car, the amount of
cargo, and the speed at which the vehicle
will be driven for a prolonged period. This
information can be found on the tire infla-
tion placard(s) located on the driver's side
B-pillar or on the inside of the fuel filler door
on Canadian models, and in the tire infla-
tion table in this chapter.
•
Cold tires: The tires are considered to be
cold when they have the same temperature
as the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem-
perature is normally reached after the car
has been parked for at least 3 hours.
Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxi-
mum return of vehicle design performance.
07 Wheels and tires
Vehicle loading
07
175
Loading the vehicle
Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determining your
vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a
trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/
CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa-
tion placard:
Curb weight
The weight of the vehicle including a full tank
of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or optional equip-
ment.
Capacity weight
All weight added to the curb weight, including
cargo and optional equipment. When towing,
trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo
weight.
Permissible axle weight
The maximum allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/
CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle must
never exceed its maximum permissible weight.
Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen-
gers.
NOTE
•
The location of the various labels in your
vehicle can be found on page 252.
•
A table listing important weight limits for
your vehicle can be found on page
255.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
(1) Locate the statement "the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX pounds" on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your vehi-
cle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX
pounds.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400–750 (5×150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
WARNING
•
Exceeding the permissible axle weight,
gross vehicle weight, or any other
weight rating limits can cause tire over-
heating resulting in permanent defor-
mation or catastrophic failure.
•
Do not use replacement tires with lower
load carrying capacities than the tires
that were original equipment on the
vehicle because this will lower the vehi-
cle's GVW rating. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the originals do
not increase the vehicle's GVW rating
limitations.
07 Wheels and tires
Uniform tire quality gradings
07
176
Uniform tire quality gradings
ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST
CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY
REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE
GRADES
Quality grades can be found, where appli-
cable, on the tire sidewall between the tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
TREADWEAR
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire gra-
ded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and many depart signifi-
cantly from the norm due to variation in driving
habits, maintenance practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
TRACTION
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test sur-
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance. The trac-
tion grade assigned to this tire is based on
braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is
not a measure of cornering (turning) traction.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on braking (straight-ahead) traction
tests and is not a measure of cornering
(turning) traction.
TEMPERATURE
The temperature grades are AA (the highest),
A, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its ability to dis-
sipate heat when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can
lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-
sponds to a minimum level of performance that
all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of per-
formance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-
inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and tire failure.
07 Wheels and tires
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires
07
177
Snow chains
Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with
the following restrictions:
•
Snow chains should be installed on front
wheels only. Use only Volvo approved
snow chains.
•
If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires
and wheels are installed and are of a size
different than the original tires and wheels,
chains in some cases CANNOT be used.
Sufficient clearances between chains and
brakes, suspension and body components
must be maintained.
•
Some strap-on type chains will interfere
with brake components and therefore
CANNOT be used.
Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow
chain information.
CAUTION
•
Check local regulations regarding the
use of snow chains before installing.
•
Always follow the chain manufacturer's
installation instructions carefully. Install
chains as tightly as possible and
retighten periodically.
•
Never exceed the chain manufacturer's
specified maximum speed limit. (Under
no circumstances should you exceed
31 mph (50 km/h).
•
Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns
when driving with snow chains.
•
The handling of the vehicle can be
adversely affected when driving with
chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well
as locked wheel braking.
Snow tires, studded tires
Tires for winter use:
•
Owners who live in or regularly commute
through areas with sustained periods of
snow or icy driving conditions are strongly
advised to fit suitable winter tires to help
retain the highest degree of traction.
•
It is important to install winter tires on all
four wheels to help retain traction during
cornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail-
ure to do so could reduce traction to an
unsafe level or adversely affect handling.
•
Do not mix tires of different design as this
could also negatively affect overall tire road
grip.
•
Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roads
in warm weather. They should be removed
when the winter driving season has ended.
•
Studded tires should be run-in 300–
600 miles (500–1000 km) during which the
car should be driven as smoothly as pos-
sible to give the studs the opportunity to
seat properly in the tires. The tires should
have the same rotational direction
throughout their entire lifetime.
NOTE
Please consult state or provincial regula-
tions restricting the use of studded winter
tires before installing such tires.
07 Wheels and tires
Temporary spare
07
178
Temporary spare
The spare tire in your car is called a "Temporary
Spare".
Recommended tire pressure (see the placard
on the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) should
be maintained irrespective of which position on
the car the temporary spare tire is used on.
In the event of damage to this tire, a new one
can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.
WARNING
Current legislation prohibits the use of the
"Temporary Spare" tire other than as a tem-
porary replacement for a punctured tire. It
must be replaced as soon as possible by a
standard tire. Road holding and handling
may be affected with the "Temporary
Spare" in use. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph (80 km/h) with the "Temporary
Spare" in use.
CAUTION
The car must not be driven with wheels of
different dimensions or with a spare tire
other than the one that came with the car.
The use of different size wheels can seri-
ously damage your car's transmission.
07 Wheels and tires
Wheel nuts
07
179
Wheel nuts
G020324
Low nut.
High nut.
There are two different types of wheel nut,
depending on whether the wheels are steel or
aluminum.
Steel rims – low nut
Steel rims are normally secured using the low
type of nut, although steel rims may also use
the high type.
WARNING
Never use the short type of nut for alumi-
nium wheels. This could cause the wheel to
come loose.
Aluminum wheels – high nut
Only the high type of nut can be used for alu-
minum wheels. This is considerably different
from other types of nut because it has a rotat-
ing conical thrust washer.
NOTE
This nut can also be used on steel wheels.
Lockable wheel nut
If steel wheels with lockable wheel nuts are
used in combination with wheel covers, the
lockable wheel nut must be fitted to the stud
nearest the air valve. The wheel cover cannot
otherwise be installed on the wheel.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire rotation
07
180
G020325
The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the
tire
Summer and winter tires
•
When switching between summer and
winter tires, mark the tires to indicate
where they were mounted on the car, e.g.,
LF = left front, RR = right rear
•
Tires with tread designed to roll in only one
direction are marked with an arrow on the
sidewall.
•
Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's
braking properties and ability to force
aside rain, snow and slush.
•
The tires with the most tread should always
be at the rear (to reduce the risk of skid-
ding).
•
Contact a Volvo workshop if you are
unsure about the tread depth.
Tire rotation
Your vehicle has no recommended tire rota-
tion. The following information is intended to
help you understand why.
Tread set
As a tire ages and the rubber cures, front and
rear tires set at different angles. Therefore, if
tires are rotated, the tread will eventually set at
an angle that is a compromise. Even if ride,
handling, and road noise may still seem
acceptable, they may not be optimal. Further,
tires that are rotated, but not on a regular basis,
may actually cause more tire noise, faster tire
wear, and unpleasant changes in steering feel
and vehicle handling.
A tire that can fully adapt to its position will
provide better steering feel, lower tire noise,
and better fuel economy.
Braking stability performance
Your vehicle is driven mainly by the front tires,
which will wear faster. This can be beneficial.
Having more tread on the rear tires will help
reduce oversteer. Oversteer is when a vehicle
wants to keep turning because of momentum
and dynamic forces on its suspension.
Suspension wear diagnostics
Every suspension needs periodic inspection
and maintenance. A tire's wear pattern can be
an aid in detecting a suspension problem. Each
tire, if left in place, tells a story about the sus-
pension. Tire rotation, on the other hand, could
make suspension wear harder to detect. Early
detection is very important, because suspen-
sion problems can make tire wear worse.
If you do rotate your tires…
Please follow the tire manufacturer's recom-
mendations, as outlined in the tire manufactur-
ers tire warranty pamphlet.
Your Volvo retailer can also provide guidance
based on your particular driving circumstan-
ces.
07 Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel
07
``
181
Changing a wheel
G020331
The spare tire, jack, and crank are located
under the carpet on the floor of the cargo area.
To change a tire:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2.
Put the gear selector in Park (P) or reverse
on models with a manual transmission.
3. Block the wheels that are on the ground
with wooden blocks or large stones.
4. Remove the wheel cap (where applicable)
using the lug wrench in the tool bag.
G020332
5. With the car still on the ground, use the lug
wrench to loosen the wheel nuts 1/2–1 turn
by exerting downward pressure. Turn the
nuts counterclockwise to loosen.
6. There are two jack attachment points on
each side of the car. Position the jack cor-
rectly in the attachment (see the illustration)
and crank while simultaneously guiding the
base of the jack to the ground. The base of
the jack must be flat on a level, firm, non-
slippery surface. Before raising the car,
check that the jack is still correctly posi-
tioned in the attachment.
G024527
Jack attachment points
7. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be
changed is lifted off the ground.
8. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and
carefully remove the wheel so as not to
damage the threads on the studs.
07 Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel
07
182
WARNING
•
The jack must correctly engage the jack
attachment.
•
Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non-
slippery surface.
•
Never allow any part of your body to be
extended under a car supported by a
jack.
•
Use the jack intended for the car when
changing a tire. For any other job, use
stands to support the car.
•
Apply the parking brake and put the
gear selector in the Park (P) position or
reverse on models with a manual trans-
mission.
•
Block the wheels standing on the
ground, use rigid wooden blocks or
large stones.
•
The jack should be kept well-greased
and clean, and should not be damaged.
•
No objects should be placed between
the base of jack and the ground, or
between the jack and the attachment
bar on the vehicle.
Installing the wheel
1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel
and hub.
2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.
3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten hand-
tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten cross-
wise until all nuts are snug.
4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter-
nately tighten the bolts crosswise to
81 ft. lbs. (110 Nm).
5. Install the wheel cap (where applicable).
Returning the jack to its storage space
G029335
The jack (certain models) and tools should be
returned to their correct storage places after
use.
•
On vehicles equipped with a jack and
spare wheel, the jack should be cranked
down to the position shown in the illustra-
tion.
•
On vehicles equipped with the tire sealing
system, the jack should be cranked down
as far as possible and returned to its stor-
age position in the foam block.
WARNING
The jack and any tools should always be
returned to their proper storage compart-
ments after use to help keep them securely
in place in the event of sudden braking, etc.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
07
``
183
Introduction
Certain models are equipped with a tire sealing
system that enables you to temporarily seal a
hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire,
or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure.
The system consists of an air compressor, a
container for the sealing compound, wiring to
connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical
system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a
hose used to connect the system to the tire’s
inflation valve.
The 12-volt sockets are located in the front
tunnel console and on the rear side of the tun-
nel console, in the rear seat.
Accessing the tire sealing system
The tire sealing system is stowed under the
floor of the cargo area. To access it:
1. Fold up or remove any carpet or other floor
covering.
2. Open the floor hatch.
3. Lift out the tire sealing system.
NOTE
•
The tire sealing system is only intended
to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not
the sidewall.
•
Tires with large holes or tears cannot be
repaired with the tire sealing system.
WARNING
•
After using the tire sealing system, the
vehicle should not be driven farther than
approximately 120 miles (200 km).
•
Have the tire inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician as
soon as possible to determine if it can
be permanently repaired or must be
replaced.
•
The vehicle should not be driven faster
than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire
that has been temporarily repaired with
the tire sealing system.
•
After using the tire sealing system, drive
carefully and avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers and sudden stops.
Tire sealing system–overview
G020400
Speed limit sticker
On/Off switch
Electrical wire
Bottle holder (orange cover)
Protective hose cover
Air release knob
Hose
Bottle with sealing compound
Air pressure gauge
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
07
184
WARNING
Please keep the following points in mind
when using the tire sealing system:
•
The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in
the illustration) contains 1.2-Ethanol
and natural rubber-latex. These sub-
stances are harmful if swallowed.
•
The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the skin, the cen-
tral nervous system, and the eyes.
Precautions:
•
Keep out of reach of children.
•
Do not ingest the contents.
•
Avoid prolonged or repeated contact
with the skin.
•
Hands should be washed thoroughly
after handling.
First aid:
•
Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention
if symptoms occur.
•
Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least
15 minutes, occasionally lifting the
upper and lower eyelids. Get medical
attention if symptoms occur.
•
Inhalation: Move the person to fresh air.
If irritation persists, get medical atten-
tion.
Tire sealing system–temporarily
repairing a flat tire
G014338
Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two
stages:
•
Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping
sealing compound into the tire. The car is
then driven a short distance to distribute
the sealing compound in the tire.
NOTE
Do not remove any foreign objects (nails,
etc.) from the tire before using the sealing
system.
•
Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is
checked and adjusted if necessary.
WARNING
•
Never leave the tire sealing system
unattended when it is operating.
•
Keep the tire sealing system away from
children.
•
Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off
the road and away from moving traffic.
•
Apply the parking brake.
Stage 1: Sealing the hole
1. Open the cover on the tire sealing kit.
2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it
to the steering wheel hub where it will be
clearly visible to the driver.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
07
``
185
3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in position
0 (the 0 side of the switch should be
pressed down).
4. Put on the gloves included in the tire seal-
ing system.
WARNING
Contact with the sealing compound may
cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash
the affected area immediately with soap and
water.
5. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle
holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle
of sealing compound.
NOTE
Do not break the seal on the bottle. This
occurs automatically when the bottle is
screwed into the holder.
6. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder.
WARNING
The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep
it securely in place and help prevent sealing
compound leakage. Once in place, the bot-
tle cannot be unscrewed. This must be done
by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
7. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla-
tion valve and screw the tire sealing sys-
tem’s hose connector onto the valve as
tightly as possible by hand.
8. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest
12-volt socket in the vehicle.
9. Start the vehicle’s engine.
10. Start the tire sealing system’s compressor
by pressing the on/off switch to position I.
WARNING
•
Never stand next to the tire being inflated
when the compressor is in operation.
•
If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,
switch off the compressor immediately.
•
If there is visible damage to the sidewall
or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired.
The vehicle should not be driven if this
occurs. Contact a towing service or
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if
applicable.
NOTE
The air pressure gauge will temporarily
show an increase in pressure to approxi-
mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing com-
pound is being pumped into the tire. The
pressure should return to a normal level
after approximately 30 seconds.
11. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to
between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switch
off the compressor briefly to get a clear
reading from the pressure gauge. The
compressor should not be used for more
than 10 minutes at a time to avoid over-
heating.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
07
186
CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.
WARNING
If the pressure remains below 22 psi (1.8
bar) after approximately seven minutes, turn
off the compressor. In this case, the hole is
too large to be sealed and the vehicle should
not be driven.
12. Switch off the compressor and disconnect
the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket.
13. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation
valve and reinstall the valve cap.
14. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi-
mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the seal-
ing compound in the tire.
NOTE
•
Safely stow the tire sealing system in a
convenient place as it will soon be used
again to check the tire’s inflation pres-
sure.
•
The empty bottle of sealing compound
cannot be removed from the bottle
holder. Consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician to have the
bottle removed and properly disposed
of.
WARNING
If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering
behavior, or noises should occur while driv-
ing, reduce speed and park the vehicle in a
safe place. Recheck the tire for bumps,
cracks, or other visible damage, and
recheck its inflation pressure. If the pressure
is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continue
driving. Have the vehicle towed to a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure
1. Connect the tire sealing system as descri-
bed in stage 1.
2. Refer to the inflation pressure tablesfor the
correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs
to be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s
compressor. If necessary, release air from
the tire by turning the air release knob
counterclockwise.
CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.
WARNING
If you interrupt your trip for more than 1
hour, check the inflation pressure in the
damaged tire again before continuing.
Replacing the sealing compound
container
The sealing compound container must be
replaced if:
•
the tire sealing system has been used to
repair a tire
•
the container’s expiration date has passed
(see the date on decal).
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
07
187
NOTE
•
After use, the sealing compound bottle,
the hose, and certain other system
components must be replaced. Please
consult your Volvo retailer for replace-
ment parts.
•
If the sealing compound bottle’s expi-
ration date has passed, please take it to
a Volvo retailer or a recycling station
that can properly dispose of harmful
substances.
Inflating tires
The tire sealing system can be used to inflate
the tires. To do so:
1. Park the car in a safe place.
2. The compressor should be switched off.
Ensure that the on/off switch is in posi-
tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be
pressed down).
3. Take out the electrical wire and hose.
4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla-
tion valve and screw the hose connector
onto the valve as tightly as possible by
hand.
5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest
12-volt socket in the vehicle.
6. Start the vehicle’s engine.
WARNING
•
The vehicle’s engine should be running
when the tire sealing system is used to
avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure
the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated
place, or outdoors, before using the sys-
tem.
•
Children should never be left unattended
in the vehicle when the engine is running.
7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the
gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly to
get a clear reading from the pressure
gauge.
8. Refer to the tire inflation tables for the cor-
rect inflation pressure. If the tire needs to
be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s
compressor (press the on/off switch to
position I). If necessary, release air from the
tire by turning the air release knob coun-
terclockwise.
CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.
9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off
switch to position 0) when the correct infla-
tion pressure has been reached.
10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation
valve and reinstall the valve cap.
11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the
12-volt socket.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
07
188
Introduction
The tire pressure monitoring system uses sen-
sors mounted in the tire valves to check infla-
tion pressure levels. When the vehicle is
moving at a speed of approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit
inflation pressure data to a receiver located in
the vehicle.
NOTE
USA – FCC ID: KR5S122780002
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
When low inflation pressure is detected, TPMS
will light up the tire pressure warning light (also
referred to as a telltale) in the instrument panel,
and will display a message in the text window.
The wording of this message is determined by
the degree of inflation pressure loss.
NOTE
If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressure
warning light will flash for approximately
1 minute and
TIRE PRESS SYST
SERVICE REQUIRED
will be displayed.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-
er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the mal-
function indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
07
189
NOTE
•
TPMS indicates low tire pressure but
does not replace normal tire mainte-
nance. For information on correct tire
pressure, please refer to the tables
beginning, see page 170, or consult
your Volvo retailer.
•
The tire pressure warning light will not
identify which tire is underinflated. Be
sure to check all four tires.
•
A certain amount of air seepage from
the tires occurs naturally and tire pres-
sure fluctuates with seasonal changes
in temperature. Always check tire pres-
sure regularly.
Erasing warning messages
When a low tire pressure warning message has
been displayed, and the tire pressure warning
light has come on:
1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the
inflation pressure of all four tires.
2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure
(consult the tire pressure placard or the
tables, see page 170 ).
3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to
drive the vehicle for several minutes at a
speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This
will erase the warning text and the warning
light will go out.
WARNING
Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire
failure, resulting in a loss of control of the
vehicle.
Changing wheels with TPMS
Please note the following when changing or
replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/
tires on the vehicle:
•
Only the factory-mounted wheels are
equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves.
•
If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary
spare tire, this tire does not have a TPMS
sensor.
•
If wheels without TPMS sensors are moun-
ted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS SYST
SERVICE REQUIRED
will be displayed
each time the vehicle is driven above
25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or more.
•
Once TPMS sensors are properly installed,
the warning message should not reappear.
If the message is still displayed, drive the
vehicle for several minutes at a speed of
20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to erase the
message.
•
Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors be
fitted on all wheels used on the vehicle.
Volvo does not recommend moving sen-
sors back and forth between sets of
wheels.
NOTE
•
If you change to tires with a different
recommended inflation pressure, the
TPMS system must be recalibrated to
these tires. This must be done by an
authorized Volvo retailer or workshop.
•
If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sen-
sor is moved to another wheel, the sen-
sor's seal, nut, and valve core should be
replaced.
•
When installing TPMS sensors, the
vehicle must be parked for at least
15 minutes with the ignition off. If the
vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a
TPMS error message will be displayed.
CAUTION
When inflating tires with TPMS valves, press
the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the
valve to help avoid bending or otherwise
damaging the valve.
G020920
190
Washing and cleaning the car............................................................... 192
Paint touch up....................................................................................... 196
08
CAR CARE
08 Car care
Washing and cleaning the car
08
192
Washing the car
The following points should be kept in mind
when washing and cleaning the car:
•
The car should be washed at regular inter-
vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots
adhere to the paint and may cause dam-
age. To help prevent corrosion, it is partic-
ularly important to wash the car frequently
in the wintertime when salt has been used
on the roads.
•
Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight.
Doing so may cause detergents and wax
to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid
scratching, use lukewarm water to soften
the dirt before you wash with a soft
sponge, and plenty of sudsy water.
•
Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork
as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish
may be permanently damaged.
•
A detergent can be used to facilitate the
softening of dirt and oil.
•
A water-soluble grease solvent may be
used in cases of sticky dirt. However, use
a wash place equipped with a drainage
separator.
•
Dry the car with a clean chamois and
remember to clean the drain holes in the
doors and rocker panels.
•
Tar spots can be removed with kerosene
or tar remover after the car has been
washed.
•
A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy
water can be used to clean the wiper
blades. Frequent cleaning of the wind-
shield and wiper blades improves visibility
considerably and also helps prolong the
service life of the wiper blades.
•
Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel
housings, fenders, etc).
•
In areas of high industrial fallout, more fre-
quent washing is recommended.
•
After cleaning the engine, the spark plug
wells should be inspected for water and
blown dry if necessary.
NOTE
When washing the car, remember to remove
dirt from the drain holes in the doors and
sills.
Exterior components
Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning
products, available at your Volvo retailer, for
cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental
components such as chromed strips on the
exterior of your vehicle. The instructions for
using these products should be followed care-
fully.Solvents or stain removers should not be
used.
CAUTION
•
Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub-
ber components
•
Polishing chromed strips can wear
away or damage the surface
•
Polishes containing abrasive sub-
stances should not be used
08 Car care
Washing and cleaning the car
08
``
193
CAUTION
•
During high pressure washing, the
spray mouthpiece must never be closer
to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do not
spray into the locks.
•
Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can
reduce lighting capacity considerably.
Clean the headlights regularly, for
example when refueling.
•
When washing or steam cleaning the
engine, avoid spraying water or steam
directly on the electrical components or
toward the rear side of the engine.
•
Always close the moonroof (option) and
sun shade before washing your vehicle.
•
Never use abrasive cleaning agents on
the moonroof.
•
Never use wax on the rubber seals
around the moonroof.
Automatic washing – simple and quick
We do NOT recommend washing your car in an
automatic wash during the first six months
(because the paint will not have hardened suf-
ficiently).
An automatic wash is a simple and quick way
to clean your car, but it is worth remembering
that it may not be as thorough as when you
yourself go over the car with sponge and water.
Keeping the underbody clean is most impor-
tant, especially in the winter. Some automatic
washers do not have facilities for washing the
underbody.
CAUTION
•
Before driving into an automatic car
wash, turn off the optional rain sensor
to avoid damaging the windshield wip-
ers.
•
Make sure that side view mirrors, auxil-
iary lamps, etc, are secure, and that any
antenna(s) are retracted or removed.
Otherwise there is risk of the machine
dislodging them
•
Chromed wheels: Clean chrome-
plated wheels using the same deter-
gents used for the body of the vehicle.
Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can
permanently stain chrome-plated
wheels.
WARNING
•
When the car is driven immediately after
being washed, apply the brakes several
times in order to remove any moisture
from the brake linings.
•
Engine cleaning agents should not be
used when the engine is warm. This
constitutes a fire risk.
Exterior lighting
Condensation may form temporarily on the
inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as
headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is nor-
mal and the lights are designed to withstand
moisture. Normally, condensation will dissi-
pate after the lights have been on for a short
time.
Polishing and Waxing
•
Normally, polishing is not required during
the first year after delivery, however, wax-
ing may be beneficial.
•
Before applying polish or wax the vehicle
must be washed and dried. Tar spots can
be removed with kerosene or tar remover.
Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing
compound.
•
After polishing use liquid or paste wax.
•
Several commercially available products
contain both polish and wax.
•
Waxing alone does not substitute for pol-
ishing a dull surface.
•
A wide range of polymer-based waxes can
be purchased today. These waxes are easy
to use and produce a long-lasting, high-
gloss finish that protects the bodywork
against oxidation, road dirt and fading.
•
Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct
sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should
not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C).
08 Car care
Washing and cleaning the car
08
194
CAUTION
Volvo does not recommend the use of long-
life or durable paint protection coatings,
some of which may claim to prevent pitting,
fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings have
not been tested by Volvo for compatibility
with your vehicle's clear coat. Some of them
may cause the clear coat to soften, crack,
or cloud. Damage caused by application of
paint protection coatings may not be cov-
ered under your vehicle's paint warranty.
Upholstery care
Fabric
Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For
more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream,
shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric
stain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer.
Interior plastic components
Cleaning interior plastic components should
be done with a cleaning agent specially
designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo
retailer.
Alcantera™ suede-like material
Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a
soft cloth and mild soap solution.
Leather care
Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured
with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time,
sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the
protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and
fading can result.
Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy
leather care kit formulated to clean and beau-
tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the
protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner
removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream
protectant restores a barrier against soil and
sunlight.
Volvo also offers a special leather softener that
should be applied after the cleaner and pro-
tectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and
reduces friction between leather and other fin-
ishes in the vehicle.
Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and
conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four
times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about
Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft-
ener 943 7429.
Cleaning leather upholstery
1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge
and squeeze it until the cleaner foams.
2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the
sponge with circular movements.
3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the
sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain,
do not rub.
4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a
towel, and allow the leather to dry com-
pletely.
Protecting leather upholstery
1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on
a cloth and apply a thin coating of cream
to the upholstery with light circular move-
ments.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.
This will help the leather resist staining and
protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.
08 Car care
Washing and cleaning the car
08
195
CAUTION
•
Under no circumstances should gaso-
line, naphtha or similar cleaning agents
be used on the plastic or the leather
since these can cause damage.
•
Take extra care when removing stains
such as ink or lipstick since the coloring
can spread.
•
Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol-
vent can damage the seat padding.
•
Start from the outside of the stain and
work toward the center.
•
Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a
pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing
may damage the textile upholstery.
•
Clothing that is not colorfast, such as
new jeans or suede garments, may stain
the upholstery.
Cleaning the seat belts
Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild
soap solution.
Cleaning floor mats
The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed
clean regularly, especially during winter when
they should be taken out for drying. Spots on
textile mats can be removed with a mild deter-
gent. For best protection in winter, Volvo rec-
ommends the use of Volvo rubber floor mats.
Consult your Volvo retailer.
08 Car care
Paint touch up
08
196
Touching up minor paint damage
Paint damage requires immediate attention to
avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish
regularly - when washing the vehicle for
instance. Touch-up if necessary.
Paint repairs require special equipment and
skill. Contact a trained and authorized Volvo
service technician for any extensive damage.
Minor scratches can be repaired by using
Volvo touch-up paint.
Color code
G031024
When ordering touch-up paint from your Volvo
retailer, make sure you have the right color.
Use the paint code indicated on the model
plate (1 in the illustration).
Minor stone chips and scratches
Material:
•
Primer – can
•
Paint – touch-up pen
•
Brush
•
Masking tape
G020345
NOTE
When touching up the vehicle, it should be
clean and dry. The surface temperature
should be above 60° F (15° C).
If the stone chip has not penetrated down
to the metal and an undamaged layer of
paint remains, the touch-up paint can be
applied as soon as the spot has been
cleaned.
Deep scratches
1. Place a strip of masking tape over the dam-
aged surface. Pull the tape off so that any
loose flakes of paint adhere to it.
2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with
a small brush. When the primer surface is
dry, the paint can be applied using a brush.
Mix the paint thoroughly; apply several thin
paint coats and let dry after each applica-
tion.
3. If there is a longer scratch, you may want
to protect surrounding paint by masking it
off.
08 Car care
08
197
G020922
198
Volvo maintenance................................................................................ 200
Maintaining your car.............................................................................. 202
Hood..................................................................................................... 204
Engine compartment............................................................................. 205
Engine oil............................................................................................... 206
Fluids..................................................................................................... 208
Wiper blades......................................................................................... 210
Battery................................................................................................... 211
Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 213
Fuses..................................................................................................... 221
09
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
09 Maintenance and servicing
Volvo maintenance
09
200
General
Volvo advises you to follow the maintenance
program outlined in the Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet. This mainte-
nance program contains inspections and serv-
ices necessary for the proper function of your
vehicle. The maintenance services contain
several checks that require special tools and
training, and therefore must be performed by a
qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top
condition, specify time-tested and proven
Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories.
The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S
The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle
manufacturers to furnish written instructions to
the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper
servicing and function of the components that
control emissions. These services, which are
listed in the "Warranty and Service Records
Information" booklet, are not covered by the
warranty. You will be required to pay for labor
and material used.
Maintenance
Your Volvo passed several major inspections
before it was delivered to you, in accordance
with Volvo specifications. The maintenance
procedures outlined in the Warranty and Serv-
ice Records Information booklet, many of
which will positively affect your vehicle's emis-
sions, should be performed as indicated. It is
recommended that receipts for vehicle emis-
sion maintenance be retained in case ques-
tions arise concerning maintenance. Inspec-
tion and maintenance should also be
performed anytime a malfunction is observed
or suspected.
Applicable warranties – U.S/Canada
In accordance with applicable U.S. and Cana-
dian regulations, the following list of warranties
is provided.
•
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
•
Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
•
Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty
•
Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tems Limited Warranty
•
Emission Design and Defect Warranty
•
Emission Performance Warranty
These are the federal warranties; other warran-
ties are provided as required by state/provin-
cial law. Refer to your separate Warranty and
Service Records Information booklet for
detailed information concerning each of the
warranties.
Periodic maintenance helps minimize
emissions
Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehi-
cle running well. Your Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet provides a com-
prehensive periodic maintenance schedule up
to 150,000 miles (240,000 km) of vehicle main-
tenance. The schedule includes components
that affect vehicle emissions. This page
describes some of the emission-related com-
ponents.
Vehicle Event Data (Black Box)
Your vehicle's driving and safety systems
employ computers that monitor, and share
with each other, information about your vehi-
cle's operation. One or more of these comput-
ers may store what they monitor, either during
normal vehicle operation or in a crash or near-
crash event. Stored information may be read
and used by:
•
Volvo Car Corporation
•
service and repair facilities
09 Maintenance and servicing
Volvo maintenance
09
201
•
law enforcement or government agencies
•
others who may assert a legal right to
know, or who obtain your consent to know
such information.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Maintaining your car
09
202
Owner maintenance
Periodic maintenance requirements and inter-
vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty
and Service Records Information booklet.
The following points can be carried out
between the normally scheduled maintenance
services.
Each time the car is refueled:
•
Check the engine oil level.
•
Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,
headlights, and taillights.
Monthly:
•
Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect
the tires for wear.
•
Check that engine coolant and other fluid
levels are between the indicated "min" and
"max" markings.
•
Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass
cleaner and soft paper towels.
•
Wipe driver information displays with a soft
cloth.
•
Visually inspect battery terminals for cor-
rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose ter-
minal connector, or a battery near the end
of its useful service life. Consult a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician for
additional information.
As needed:
•
Wash the car, including the undercarriage,
to reduce wear that can be caused by a
buildup of dirt, and corrosion that can be
caused by salt residues.
•
Clean leaves and twigs from air intake
vents at the base of the windshield, and
from other places where they may collect.
NOTE
Complete service information for qualified
technicians is available online for purchase
or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.
Emission inspection readiness
What is an Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II)?
OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized
engine management system. It stores diagnos-
tic information about your vehicle's emission
controls. It can light the Check Engine light
(MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A
"fault" is a component or system that is not
performing within an expected range. A fault
may be permanent or temporary. OBD II will
store a message about any fault.
How Do States Use OBD II for Emission
Inspections?
Many states connect a computer directly to a
vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can
then read "faults." In some states, this type of
inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission
test.
How Can My Vehicle Fail OBD II Emission
Inspection?
Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec-
tion for any of the following reasons.
•
If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your
vehicle may fail inspection.
•
If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit,
but went out without any action on your
part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault.
Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending
on the inspection practices in your area.
•
If you had recent service that required dis-
connecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic
information may be incomplete and "not
ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not
ready may fail inspection.
How Can I Prepare for My Next OBD II
Emission Inspection?
•
If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or
was lit but went out without service, have
09 Maintenance and servicing
Maintaining your car
09
203
your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary,
serviced by a qualified Volvo technician.
•
If you recently had service for a lit Check
Engine light, or if you had service that
required disconnecting the battery, a
period of driving is necessary to bring the
OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. A
half-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/high-
way driving is typically needed to allow
OBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvo
retailer can provide you with more infor-
mation on planning a trip.
•
Maintain your vehicle in accordance with
your vehicle's maintenance schedule.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Hood
09
204
Opening the hood
G031032
To open the hood:
1. Pull the lever located under the left side of
the dash to release the hood lock.
2. Lift the hood slightly.
3. Press up the release control located under
the front edge of the hood (at the center)
up to the right, and lift the hood.
WARNING
Check that the hood locks engage properly
when closed.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Engine compartment
09
205
G026456
Cooling system expansion tank
Power steering fluid reservoir (concealed
behind the headlight)
Dipstick – engine oil
Radiator
Cooling fan
Washer fluid reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
Battery
Relay/fuse box
Air cleaner
WARNING
The cooling fan may start or continue to
operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine
has been switched off.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Engine oil
09
206
Changing engine oil and oil filter
See page 259 for oil specifications. Refer to
the Warranty and Service Records Information
booklet for information on the oil change inter-
vals.
Volvo recommends Castrol.
NOTE
•
Volvo does not recommend the use of
oil additives.
•
Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is
changed at the normal maintenance
intervals except at owner request and at
additional charge. Please consult a
trained and qualified Volvo service tech-
nician.
Checking and adding oil
The oil level should be checked every time the
vehicle is refueled. This is especially important
during the period up to the first scheduled
maintenance service
•
The car should be parked on a level surface
when the oil is checked.
•
If the engine is warm, wait for at least 10–
15 minutes after the engine has been
switched off before checking the oil.
G020338
Location of dipstick and oil filler cap
Checking the oil
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lint-
free rag.
2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and check
the oil level.
3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to
the MIN mark, add approximately
1 US quart (1 liter) of oil.
4. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
5. Switch off the engine and wait for at least
10–15 minutes and recheck the oil level. If
necessary, add oil until the level is near the
MAX mark.
G020336
CAUTION
•
Not checking the oil level regularly can
result in serious engine damage if the oil
level becomes too low.
•
Oil that is lower than the specified qual-
ity can damage the engine.
•
Always add oil of the same type and
viscosity as already used.
•
Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This
could cause an increase in oil consump-
tion.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Engine oil
09
207
WARNING
Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into
contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces
NOTE
Volvo uses different systems to indicate a
low oil level or pressure. Some models have
an oil pressure sensor, in which case a
warning symbol (see page 57) is used to
indicate low oil pressure. Other models have
an oil level sensor, in which case the driver
is alerted by the warning symbol in the cen-
ter of the instrument panel and a text in the
information display. Some models use both
systems. Contact an authorized Volvo
retailer for more information.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fluids
09
208
Washer fluid
G026425
Washer fluid reservoir
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment and holds approximately
6.8 US qts (6.5 liters). During cold weather, the
reservoir should be filled with windshield
washer solvent containing antifreeze.
Coolant
G020334
Coolant reservoir
Normally, the coolant does not need to be
changed. If the system must be drained, con-
sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-
nician.
CAUTION
•
If necessary, top up the cooling system
with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreeze
only (a 50/50 mix of water and anti-
freeze).
•
Different types of antifreeze/coolant
may not be mixed.
•
If the cooling system is drained, it
should be flushed with clean water or
premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled
with the correct mixture of water/anti-
freeze.
•
The cooling system must always be
kept filled to the correct level, and the
level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there
can be high local temperatures in the
engine which could result in damage.
Check coolant regularly!
•
Do not top up with water only. This
reduces the rust-protective and anti-
freeze qualities of the coolant and has a
lower boiling point. It can also cause
damage to the cooling system if it
should freeze.
•
Do not use chlorinated tap water in the
vehicles cooling system.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fluids
09
209
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap while the
engine is warm. Wait until the vehicle cools.
If it is necessary to top off the coolant when
the engine is warm, unscrew the expansion
tank cap slowly so that the overpressure
dissipates.
Brake fluid
G020333
Brake fluid reservoir
The brake fluid should always be between the
MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reser-
voir. Check, without removing the cap, that
there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir.
Fluid type: DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F
(280 °C), P/N 9437433
Replace: The fluid should be replaced accord-
ing to the intervals specified in the Warranty
and Service Records Information booklet.
When driving under extremely hard conditions
(mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary to
replace the fluid more often. Consult your
Volvo retailer. Always entrust brake fluid
changing to a trained and qualified Volvo serv-
ice technician.
Power steering fluid
The fluid level is checked at each service inter-
val.
Fluid type: Volvo power steering fluid or equiv-
alent.
Replace: No fluid change required.
WARNING
If a problem should occur in the power
steering system or if the vehicle has no elec-
trical current and must be towed, it is still
possible to steer the vehicle. However, keep
in mind that greater effort will be required to
turn the steering wheel.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Wiper blades
09
210
Replacing windshield wiper blades
G020330
1. Fold out the wiper arm.
2. Press the button on the wiper blade attach-
ment and pull straight out (1), parallel with
the wiper arm.
3. Press a new wiper blade (2) until it clicks
into place.
4. Ensure the blade is securely attached (3).
5. Fold in the wiper arm.
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than the one
on the passenger's side.
G020329
Liftgate wiper blade
G007444
1. Fold out the wiper arm.
2. Remove the wiper blade by pulling it
straight out from the wiper arm.
3. Press the new wiper blade securely into
place.
Fold in the wiper arm.
Keeping the windshield/liftgate window and
wiper blades clean helps improve visibility and
prolongs the service life of the wiper blades.
See page 192 for washing instructions.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Battery
09
``
211
Battery maintenance
Driving habits and conditions, climate, the
number of starts, etc., all affect the service life
and function of the battery. In order for your
battery to perform satisfactorily, keep the fol-
lowing in mind:
Check the fluid level in each cell in the battery
every 24 months or every 15,000
1
miles
(24,000 km), whichever is sooner.
•
Use a screw driver to open the caps or
cover and a flashlight to inspect the level.
•
If necessary, add distilled water. The level
should never be above the indicator.
•
The fluid level should be checked if the
battery has been recharged.
•
After inspection, be sure the cap over each
battery cell or the cover is securely in
place.
•
Check that the battery cables are correctly
connected and properly tightened.
•
Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running, or when the key is in the
ignition. This could damage the vehicle's
electrical system.
•
The battery should be disconnected from
the vehicle when a battery charger is used
directly on the battery.
WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the state of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
Battery symbols:
Wear protection goggles
See owner's manual for
details
Keep away from children
Corrosive
No smoking, no open flames,
no sparks
Explosion
Battery replacement
Removing the battery
1. Switch off the ignition and remove the key.
2. Wait at least 5 minutes after switching off
the ignition before disconnecting the bat-
tery so that all information in the vehicle's
electrical system can be stored in the con-
trol modules.
1
More frequently in warm climates.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Battery
09
212
3. Remove the cover over the battery.
4. Disconnect the battery negative (ground)
cable.
5. Disconnect the positive cable.
6. Remove the front side of the battery box
with a screwdriver.
7. Release the clamp holding the battery.
8. Lift out the battery.
Installing a new battery
1. Put the battery in place in the engine com-
partment.
2. Install the battery's retaining clamp.
3. Reinstall the front side of the battery box.
4. Connect the positive cable.
5. Connect the ground cable.
6. Reinstall the cover over the battery.
NOTE
Used batteries should be properly disposed
of at a recycling station or similar facility, or
taken to your Volvo retailer.
WARNING
•
Never expose the battery to open flame
or electric spark.
•
Do not smoke near the battery.
•
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,
skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con-
tact occurs, flush the affected area
immediately with water. Obtain medical
help immediately if eyes are affected.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
09
``
213
Introduction
Before replacing bulbs in your vehicle, please
keep the following points in mind:
NOTE
Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fin-
gers. Grease and oils from your fingers
vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit
on the reflector, which will damage it.
The optional Bi-Xenon
headlight bulbs
contain trace amounts of mercury. These
bulbs should always be disposed of by a
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian.
Certain bulbs should only be replaced by a
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian:
•
Courtesylighting
•
Reading lights
•
Glove compartment lights
•
Turn signals and courtesy lights in the
side door mirrors
•
High-mounted brake lights
•
Bi-Xenon
headlights, Brake lights
Removing the headlight housing
WARNING
•
The engine should not be running when
changing bulbs.
•
When changing in the headlight hous-
ing, if the engine has been running just
prior to replacing bulbs, please be
aware that components in the engine
compartment will be hot.
G007334
The entire headlight housing must be lifted out
when replacing the high/low beam, parking
light, turn signal, and side marker bulbs. To lift
out the housing:
1. Remove the key from the ignition and turn
the headlight switch to position 0.
2. Open the hood.
3. Pull up the headlight housing's retaining
pin.
4. Pull out the headlight housing.
4
G007612
5. Disconnect the wiring connector by press-
ing down the clip with your thumb while at
the same time pulling the connector with
your other hand.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
09
214
6. Lift out the headlight housing and place it
on a soft surface to avoid scratching the
lens.
CAUTION
When disconnecting the connector, pull on
the connector itself and not on the wiring.
After the defective bulb has been replaced,
reinsert the housing in the reverse order. Check
that the retaining pin is correctly inserted.
WARNING
Bi-Xenon headlights (option) – due to the
high voltage used by these headlights,
these bulbs should only be replaced by a
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian.
Low beam bulb
G020255
Cover with retaining clamps
1. Open the hood and remove the headlight
housing (see page 213 for instructions).
2. Release the retaining clamps on the cover.
3. Release the bulb's retaining spring holding
the bulb in place by pressing it first to the
left and then moving it outward and down-
ward.
4. Pull out the bulb.
G007339
Low beam bulb
Installing a new bulb
1. Insert the new bulb. It can only be installed
in one position.
2. Press the retaining spring inward and
upward and slightly to the right until it
snaps into place.
3. Press the wiring connector onto the bulb.
4. Put the plastic cover in place.
5. Press the retaining clamps back into place.
6. Reinstall the headlight housing (see
page 213).
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
09
``
215
High beam bulb
G007338
Halogen high beam bulb
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlight housing (see
page 213).
NOTE
The halogen high beam bulb has a different
socket on vehicles equipped with Bi-
Xenon
headlights. On these models, pull
the bulb straight out.
WARNING
Bi-Xenon
headlights (option) – due to the
high voltage used by these headlights, the
Bi-Xenon
bulbs should only be replaced by
a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-
nician.
3. Driver's side headlight: Turn the bulb
holder counterclockwise.
Passenger's side headlight: Turn the bulb
holder clockwise.
4. Pull out the bulb holder and replace the
bulb.
5. Reinstall the bulb holder. It can only be
installed in one position.
6. Reinstall the headlight housing (see
page 213).
Parking light bulb
G007392
1. Pull out the bulb holder with a pair of pliers.
The bulb holder should not be pulled out
by the wire.
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Press the bulb holder back into place. It
can only be installed in one position.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
09
216
Turn signal
G007393
1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and
remove it.
2. Remove the bulb from the holder by press-
ing it in and twisting it counterclockwise.
3. Insert a new bulb and reinstall the bulb
holder in the headlight housing.
Side marker light
G007394
1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise,
pull it out, and replace the bulb.
2. Reinstall the bulb holder. It can only be
installed in one position.
Front fog light (option)
G020348
1. Switch off all lights and turn the key to
position 0.
2. Remove the panel around the fog light
housing.
3. Unscrew both torx screws in the fog light
housing and remove it.
4. Disconnect the connector from the bulb.
5. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and pull it
out.
6. Install the new bulb in its seat and turn it
clockwise.
7. Reconnect the connector to the bulb.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
09
``
217
8. Secure the fog light housing with the
screws and press the panel back into
place.
Removing the taillight bulb holder
G007402
All bulbs in the taillight cluster can be replaced
from the cargo area. To access the bulb hold-
ers:
1. Switch off all lights and turn the key to
position 0.
2. Remove the covers (A or B) in the left/right
panels to access the bulb holders.
3. Disconnect the wiring connector from the
affected bulb holder.
4. Press the catches together and pull out the
bulb holder.
5. Replace the defective bulb.
6. Press the wiring connector back into posi-
tion.
7. Press the bulb holder into place and rein-
stall the cover.
Location of taillight bulbs
G007395
Location of taillight bulbs
Brake light (LED)
1
Taillight/parking light/fog light (driver’s
side only)
Taillight/parking light
Turn signal
Back-up light
Taillight/parking light
NOTE
If the message indicating a burned out bulb
remains in the information display after the
bulb has been replaced, consult a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
High-level brake light
These bulbs should only be replaced by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
1
The wiring to the LED brake lights is permanently connected to the bulb holder. It should not be removed.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
09
218
License plate lighting
G007634
1. Switch off all lights and turn the key to
position 0.
2. Remove the screws with a screw driver.
3. Detach the lens (bulb housing) carefully.
4. Replace the defective bulb.
5. Reinstall the entire bulb housing and screw
it into place.
Rear grids
G007447
The grids are held in place by clips and can be
pressed into position. They can only be instal-
led one way.
Footwell lighting
G020795
The footwell lighting is located under the dash-
board on the driver's and passenger's sides.
To replace a bulb:
1. Insert a screwdriver under the edge of the
lens. Turn the screwdriver gently to detach
the lens.
2. Remove the defective bulb.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Press the lens back into place.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
09
``
219
Cargo area lighting
G007613
1. Insert a screwdriver and turn it gently to
detach the bulb housing.
2. Remove the defective bulb.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Press the bulb housing back into place.
Cabin lighting in the cargo area
G010326
The rear cabin lighting consists of a light on the
driver’s side of the cargo area
1. Insert a screwdriver and turn it carefully to
release the lens.
2. Remove the connector from the bulb
holder.
3. Replace the defective bulb.
4. Press the lens back into place.
Vanity mirror lighting
G020253
1. Insert a screwdriver under the center of the
lower edge of the mirror, turn it, and care-
fully pry up the lugs at the edge.
2. Move the screwdriver under the edge on
the left and right-hand sides (near the black
rubber sections) and pry carefully to
release the lower edge of the mirror.
3. Pry carefully and lift out the entire mirror
and the cover.
4. Remove the defective bulb and replace it
with a new one.
5. To reinstall the mirror, begin by pressing
the three lugs at the upper edge of the mir-
ror back into place.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
09
220
6. Press the three lower lugs back into place.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
``
221
Replacing fuses
There are relay/fuse boxes located in the
engine compartment and the passenger com-
partment.
If an electrical component fails to function, this
may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest way
to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it.
To do so:
1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is difficult
to remove, special fuse removal tools are
located on the inside of the fuse box cov-
ers.
2. From the side, examine the curved metal
wire in the fuse to see if it is intact.
3. If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of
the same color and amperage (written on
the fuse).
If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electrical
system inspected by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
WARNING
Never use metal objects or fuses with higher
amperage than those stated on the follow-
ing pages. Doing so could seriously damage
or overload the vehicle's electrical system.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
222
Fuse box in the engine compartment
G007446
The fuse box in the engine compartment has
positions for 36 fuses.
•
Fuses 1–18 are relays/circuit breakers and
should only be removed or replaced by an
authorized Volvo service technician.
•
Fuses 19–36 may be changed at any time
when necessary.
Several extra fuses and a fuse removal tool to
assist in removing/replacing fuses can be
found on the underside of the fuse box cover
in the engine compartment.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
``
223
Fuses in the engine compartment
G020250
1. Coolant fan (radiator) 50A
2. Power steering 80A
3. Feed to passenger com-
partment fuse box
60A
4. Feed to passenger com-
partment fuse box
60A
5. Element, climate unit 80A
6. Not in use
7. ABS pump 30A
8. ABS valves 20A
9. Engine functions 30A
10. Climate system blower 40A
11. Headlight washers 20A
12. Feed to heated rear window 30A
13. Starter motor relay 30A
14. Trailer connector (acces-
sory)
40A
15. Not in use
16. Feed to audio system 30A
17. Windshield wipers 30A
18. Feed to passenger com-
partment fuse box
40A
19. Not in use
20. Horn 15A
21. Not in use
22. Not in use
23. Engine control module
(ECM)/transmission control
module (TCM)
10A
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
224
24. Not in use
25. Not in use
26. Ignition switch 15A
27. A/C compressor 10A
28. Not in use
29. Front fog lights (option) 15A
30. Not in use
31. Not in use
32. Fuel injectors 10A
33. Heated oxygen sensor, vac-
uum pump
20A
34. Ignition coils, climate unit
pressure sensor
10A
35. Engine sensor valves, A/C
relay, relay coil, PTC ele-
ment oil trap, canister, mass
air meter
15A
36. Engine control module
(ECM), throttle sensor
10A
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
``
225
Fuse box in the passenger compartment
G020601
The fuse box in the passenger compartment is
located under the glove compartment.
To access the fuses:
1. Remove the upholstery covering the fuse
box by first pressing in the center pins in
the mounting clips approximately 0.5 in
(1 cm) with a small screwdriver and then
pulling the pins out.
2. Turn both retaining screws (2) counter-
clockwise until they release.
3. Fold down the fuse box (3) half way. Pull it
toward the seat until it stops. Fold it down
completely. The fuse box can be unhooked
completely.
4. Replace the blown fuse.
5. Close the fuse box in reverse order.
6. Pull the center pins fully out of the mount-
ing clips, secure the upholstery with the
mounting clips and press the pins into the
mounting clips again. The mounting clips
then expand, holding the upholstery in
position.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
226
Fuses in the passenger compartment
G020246
37. Not in use
38. Not in use
39. Not in use
40. Not in use
41. Not in use
42. Not in use
43. Audio system, Volvo Navi-
gation system (option)
15A
44. Supplemental Restrain Sys-
tem (SRS), engine control
module
10A
45. 12-volt socket in rear seat 15A
46. Lighting – glove compart-
ment, instrument panel, and
footwells
5A
47. Interior lighting 5A
48. Rear liftgate wiper/washer 15A
49. Supplemental Restrain Sys-
tem (SRS), Occupant
Weight Sensor (OWS)
10A
50. Not in use
51. Fuel filter relay 10A
52. Transmission control mod-
ule (TCM), ABS
5A
53. Power steering 10A
54. Park assist (option) Bi-
Xenon
headlights (option)
10A
55. Not in use
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
227
56. Volvo Navigation System
remote control module
(option), alarm siren control
module
10A
57. On-board diagnostic
socket, brake light switch
15A
58. Right high beam, auxiliary
lights relay
7.5A
59. Left high beam 7.5A
60. Heated driver's seat
(option)
15A
61. Heated passenger's seat
(option)
15A
62. Moonroof (option) 20A
63. Not in use
64. Audio system, Volvo Navi-
gation system (option)
5A
65. Audio system 5A
66. Audio system control mod-
ule (ICM), climate system
10A
67. Not in use
68. Cruise control 5A
69. Climate system, rain sensor
(option), BLIS button
(option)
5A
70. Not in use
71. Not in use
72. Not in use
73. Moonroof, front ceiling
lighting, auto-dim mirror,
(option) seat belt reminder
5A
74. Fuel pump relay 15A
75. Not in use
76. Not in use
77. Not in use
78. Not in use
79. Back-up lights 5A
80. Not in use
81. Not in use 20A
82. Power window – front pas-
senger's side door
25A
83. Power window and door
lock – front driver's side
door
25A
84. Power passenger's seat 25A
85. Power driver's seat 25A
86. Interior lighting relay, cargo
area light, power seats
5A
G020924
228
Audio functions..................................................................................... 230
Radio functions..................................................................................... 234
CD player/CD changer.......................................................................... 239
Audio menu........................................................................................... 243
Bluetooth hands-free connection....................................................... 244
10
AUDIO
10 Audio
Audio functions
10
230
Audio system controls
G026347
VOLUME dial
AM/FM – select a radio band
MODE – select a sound source
TUNING dial
SOUND button
G021296
Auxiliary connector
Selecting a sound source
•
Press AM/FM (2) repeatedly to toggle
between FM1, FM2, and AM.
•
Press MODE (3) repeatedly to toggle
between the CD player and the optional
external sound source AUX or the optional
Sirius satellite radio.
The currently selected sound source will be
shown in the display.
AUX
The AUX (auxiliary) port, located under the cen-
ter armrest, can be used to connect for exam-
ple, an mp3 player.
If the player is being charged through a 12-volt
socket while it is connect to the AUX port,
sound quality may be impaired.
The volume of the external sound source AUX
may be different from the volume of the internal
sound sources such as the CD player or the
radio. If the external sound source's volume is
too high, the quality of the sound may be
impaired.
This can be prevented by adjusting the external
sound source's input volume.
1. While playing the radio or a CD, lower the
audio volume to about one-quarter.
2.
Switch to
AUX mode on the audio system
by pressing the MODE button.
3. Connect the headphone output from your
music player to the AUX input using a cable
with a stereo 3.5 mm miniplug at both
ends.
4. Set your music player's headphone vol-
ume to three-quarters using the player's
volume controls.
5.
Press MENU on the audio system, and
navigate to
AUX Volume or AUX Input
Volume
.
6. Turn the volume knob to raise or lower the
AUX Input Volume until you hear music at
a comfortable level.
10 Audio
Audio functions
10
``
231
7. If there is distortion, lower your music play-
er's headphone volume until the distortion
goes away.
8. Finally, exit the menu and adjust the audio
volume to a comfortable level.
Volume
Use the volume dial (1) or the buttons in the
steering wheel keypad to adjust the volume
level. The volume level is also adjusted auto-
matically according to the vehicle's speed, see
page 233 for more information on this func-
tion.
Steering wheel keypad
G026424
Steering wheel keypad
The four buttons on the steering wheel keypad
can be used to control the audio system. The
steering wheel keypad can be used to adjust
volume, shift between preset stations and
change CD tracks. Press one of the two left-
hand buttons briefly to change to the next/
previous preset radio station, or to go to the
next/previous track on a CD. Press and hold
down these buttons to search within a track on
a CD.
Daytime/twilight display
In daylight the information is displayed against
a light background. In darkness it is displayed
against a dark background.
USB/iPod connector (option)
G019823
An auxiliary device, such as an iPod, MP3
player or a USB flash drive can be connected
to the audio system via the connector in the
center console storage compartment. A stand-
ard cable from an iPod or MP3 player can be
routed under the cover to the AUX connector
in the storage compartment.
A sound source must be chosen, depending on
the device that has been connected:
1.
Use MODE to select
iPod or USB. The text
CONNECT DEVICE will be displayed.
2. Connect the device to the connector in the
center console storage compartment (see
the illustration).
The text
LOADING will be displayed while the
system loads the files (folder structure) on the
device. This may take a short time.
When information about the files (the folder
structure) on the device has been loaded, the
resulting list includes information on the artist,
genre and song title.
To navigate in the folder structure, press
ENTER and scroll up and down the folders
using the arrow buttons (on the audio system
control panel or on the steering wheel keypad).
Press the right arrow button to select a folder.
Press the left arrow button to go up a level in
the folder structure. Press ENTER to go down
a level in the folder structure.
10 Audio
Audio functions
10
232
Tracks can be selected in two ways:
•
Turn the Tuning knob (no. 4 in the illustra-
tion on page 234) clockwise or counter-
clockwise
•
Use the right or left arrow keys on the nav-
igation control (no. 5 in the illustration on
page 234) to select the desired track. The
arrow keys on the steering wheel keypad
can also be used in the same way.
NOTE
The system supports playback of files in the
most common versions of formats such as
mp3, wma, and wav. However, there may be
versions of these formats that the system
does not support.
USB flash drive
To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is
advisable to only store music files on the drive.
It will take considerably longer for the system
to index the files on the drive if it contains any-
thing other than compatible music files.
MP3 player
Many mp3 players have a file indexing system
that is not supported by the vehicle's audio
system. In order to use an mp3 player, the sys-
tem must be set to USB Removable device/
Mass Storage Device.
iPod
An iPod receives current and its battery is
charged through the connecting cord. How-
ever, if the iPod's battery is completely
drained, it should be recharged before the iPod
is connected to the audio system.
NOTE
When an iPOD is used as a sound source,
the vehicle's audio system has a menu
structure similar to the one in the iPOD. See
the iPOD's manual for detailed information.
For further information, refer to the accessory
manual USB/iPod Music Interface.
Sound settings
Optimal sound reproduction
The audio system is calibrated for optimal
sound reproduction through the use of digital
signal processing. This calibration takes into
account the speakers, amplifier, cabin acous-
tics, the seating position of the listener, etc., for
each combination of vehicle and audio system.
There is also dynamic calibration that takes
into account the setting of the volume control,
radio reception, and the vehicle's speed. The
sound settings described in this manual, such
as BASS, TREBLE, and EQUALIZER are only
intended to enable the user to adapt sound
reproduction to his/her personal preferences.
1.
Press SOUND (5). Press this button
repeatedly until you come to the setting
that you wish to change.
2.
Turn the TUNING dial (4) to make the
desired setting.
The following settings can be made:
BASS–set the bass level
TREBLE–set the treble level
BALANCE–set the left/right sound balance
FADER–set the front/rear sound balance
CENTER–make settings for the center speaker
SURROUND–make settings for surround
sound
Surround sound
Surround sound settings are used to
balance sound levels throughout the
vehicle. Surround settings for the var-
ious sound sources are made sepa-
rately.
G021216
10 Audio
Audio functions
10
233
NOTE
•
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is only
available on the Premium Sound sys-
tem.
•
When listening to FM radio stations,
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II functions
best in areas with strong reception. If
reception is weak, selecting 2 or 3-
channel stereo may provide better
sound quality.
The Dolby symbol will be appear in the display
when Dolby Pro Logic II is activated.
There are three alternative settings:
•
Pro Logic II
•
3-channel
•
Off (normal 2-channel stereo)
Activating/deactivating Surround sound
1.
Press MENU followed by ENTER.
2.
Select
AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu and
press ENTER.
3.
Select Surround FM/AM/CD/AUX and
press ENTER.
4.
Select Pro logic II, 3-channel stereo or
Off and press ENTER.
Equalizer Front/Rear
This function is used to fine-tune the sound
level for different frequencies separately.
NOTE
This function is only available on certain
sound systems.
To adjust the equalizer settings:
1.
Press MENU followed by ENTER.
2.
Select
AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu and
press ENTER.
3.
Select Equalizer Front/Rear and press
ENTER.
The column in the display indicates the sound
level for the current frequency.
•
Adjust the level with the TUNING dial (4),
or use the Up/Down arrows. Additional fre-
quencies can be selected with the Right/
Left arrows.
•
Save the settings by pressing ENTER or
exit without saving by pressing EXIT.
Automatic sound control
The audio system's volume is adjusted auto-
matically according to the speed of the vehicle.
There are three settings available, which deter-
mine the level of volume compensation:
•
Low
•
Medium
1
•
High
To set the automatic sound level:
1.
Press MENU followed by ENTER.
2.
Select
AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu and
press ENTER.
3.
Select
AUTO. VOLUME CONTROL in the
menu and press ENTER.
4.
Select Low, Medium, or High and press
ENTER.
1
Default setting.
10 Audio
Radio functions
10
234
Radio function controls
G026366
1.
AM/FM1/FM2 selection
2. Station preset buttons
3.
TUNING dial for selecting radio stations
4.
SCAN
5.
MENU NAVIGATION CONTROL–press
the up or down arrow keys to scroll in a
menu, or the keys on the left/right sides of
the control to search for or change radio
stations/CD tracks
6.
EXIT–press to cancel a menu selection or
a selected function
7.
AUTO–search for and store the strongest
radio stations in the area in which you are
driving
Searching for stations
There are two ways to manually tune a radio
station:
1.
Turn the TUNING dial (3) to the desired fre-
quency.
2. Press the left or right arrow key on the
MENU NAVIGATION CONTROL and
hold it down. The radio scans slowly in the
selected direction and will increase the
scanning speed after a few seconds.
Release the button when the desired fre-
quency appears in the display.
The frequency can be fine-tuned by short
presses on the left/right arrow keys.
Storing preset stations
Manually storing a station
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the preset button under
which the station is to be stored. The audio
system sound will be interrupted for a few
seconds and
STATION STORED will
appear in the display.
NOTE
A total of 30 stations can be stored; 10 sta-
tions each in AM, FM1 and FM2.
Automatically storing a station
Pressing AUTO (7) automatically searches for
and stores up to ten strong AM or FM stations
in a separate memory. If more than ten stations
are found, the ten strongest ones are stored.
This function is especially useful in areas in
which you are not familiar with radio stations or
their frequencies.
To use the AUTO function:
1.
Select a waveband using the AM/FM but-
ton (1).
2.
Start the search by pressing AUTO until
AUTO STORING appears in the display.
When the search is completed,
AUTO
STORING
will no longer be displayed. If there
are no stations with sufficient signal strength,
NO AST FOUND is displayed.
The auto-stored stations can be selected using
the preset buttons (2).
Press EXIT (6) to terminate the automatic stor-
ing function.
When the radio is in auto-store mode, AUTO is
shown in the display. AUTO disappears when
you return to normal radio mode, which can be
done by briefly pressing AM/FM (1), EXIT (6),
or AUTO (7).
10 Audio
Radio functions
10
``
235
To return to the Auto-store mode, press the
AUTO button briefly and select a stored station
by pressing one of the preset buttons (2).
Saving auto-stored stations in the preset
memory
An auto-stored station can be saved in the
memory for manually preset stations.
1.
Press AUTO (7) briefly.
> Auto is displayed.
2. Press one of the preset buttons (2) under
which the station is to be stored. Hold
down the button until
STATION
STORED
is displayed.
The radio will then exit auto-store mode and
the stored station can be selected by pressing
the preset button.
Scanning
SCAN (4) automatically searches through the
selected waveband for strong AM or FM sta-
tions. When the radio finds a station, that sta-
tion will be played for approximately 8 sec-
onds, after which scanning resumes.
Activating/deactivating SCAN
1.
Select radio mode using the AM/FM but-
ton (2).
2.
Press SCAN to activate the function.
SCAN is shown in the display.
3.
Press the SCAN or EXIT button to deacti-
vate the scan function and listen to the
selected station.
Storing a station found with SCAN
A station can be stored as a preset while the
SCAN function is activated.
•
Press one of the preset buttons (2) under
which the station is to be stored. Hold
down the button until STATION
STORED
is displayed.
The SCAN function will be deactivated and the
station can be selected by pressing the preset
button.
Radio text
Certain stations broadcast program informa-
tion, which can be shown in the display.
To start this function:
1.
Select FM1 or FM2 and press the MENU
button.
2.
Press ENTER.
3.
Select RADIOTEXT in the menu and press
ENTER.
To deactivate this function, select
RADIOTEXT again and press ENTER.
Listening to satellite radio
The Sirius satellite system consists of a number
of high elevation satellites in geosynchronous
orbit.
NOTE
•
The digital signals from the Sirius satel-
lites are line-of-sight, which means that
physical obstructions such as bridges,
tunnels, etc, may temporarily interfere
with signal reception.
•
Avoid any obstructions, such as metal-
lic objects transported on roof racks or
in a ski box, or other antennas that may
impede signals from the SIRIUS satel-
lites.
Selecting Sirius radio mode
1. Press Power to switch on the audio system
(see page 234 for information on the stand-
ard radio functions).
2.
Press the MODE button repeatedly until
Sirius 1 or 2 is displayed.
Activating Sirius radio
1. Tune to a satellite channel that has no
audio, which means that the channel is
unsubscribed and the text "
Call 888-539-
SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE
" is displayed
10 Audio
Radio functions
10
236
(see also "Selecting a channel" in the right
column).
2. Call Sirius at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474).
3. When asked for the Sirius ID number press
AUTO to display this number. It is also
possible to retrieve the Sirius ID from the
MENU.
4.
"UPDATING SUBSCRIPTION" will be
displayed while the subscription is being
updated, after which the display will return
to the normal view.
SIRUS ID
The SIRIUS ID is required when contacting the
Sirius Call Center. It is used to activate your
account and when making any account trans-
actions. The SIRIUS ID is sometimes referred
to as the Electronic Serial Number (ESN).
Selecting a channel category
1. Select Sirius radio mode as described
above.
2.
Press ENTER.
3. Use the up/down arrow keys to scroll
through the list of categories.
4.
Press ENTER or the right arrow key to
select a category.
5. Use the left or right arrow keys to select a
channel in the currently chosen category.
6.
Press ENTER to listen to a channel.
NOTE
•
The category "All" is default, which ena-
bles you to scroll through the entire list
of available satellite channels.
•
The channel categories are automati-
cally updated several times a year. This
takes approximately two minutes and
will interrupt normal broadcasting. A
message will be displayed while updat-
ing is in progress. Information on chan-
nel or feature updates is available at
www.sirius.com.
Selecting a channel
There are three ways of tuning in a channel:
•
Using the left and right arrow keys
•
By turning the tuning control
•
Through direct channel entry
Direct channel entry
The Sirius satellite channels are numbered
consecutively throughout all of the categories.
To access a channel directly:
1.
Press MENU and scroll to "Direct channel
entry."
2. Use the numerical keypad to enter the
channel's number.
3.
Press ENTER. The radio will tune to this
channel, even if it belongs to a category
other than the currently selected one.
NOTE
•
The numbers of skipped or locked
channels will not be displayed.
•
If a channel is locked, the access code
must be entered before the channel can
be selected. See "Unlocking a channel"
on page 237.
Scanning
NOTE
SCAN automatically searches through the
list of satellite channels. see page 235 for
more detailed information.
Storing a channel
•
A long press on one of the number keys
stores the currently tuned channel on that
key.
•
A short press on a number key while the
radio is in Sirius 1or 2 mode will tune to the
10 Audio
Radio functions
10
``
237
preset satellite channel stored on that but-
ton, regardless of the currently selected
channel category.
Song Seek and Song Memory
The Song Seek and Song Memory functions
provide both audio and visual notification when
Sirius is broadcasting your favorite songs.
Song Seek enables you to store the name of
the song for future advance notification when
that song is being played. The Song Memory
feature makes it possible to view all of the cur-
rent songs that are stored in memory.
Song memory
Up to ten songs can be saved in the system's
memory.
1.
Press MENU.
2.
Scroll to "Add song to song mem." and
follow the instructions shown in the dis-
play.
If a new song is selected when the memory is
full, you will be prompted to press ENTER to
delete the last song on the list.
NOTE
The remaining songs in the list will move
down one position, and the newly added
song will be placed at the top of the list.
Song seek
When a satellite radio channel plays one of the
songs stored in the song memory, the listener
will be alerted by a text message and an audi-
ble signal.
•
Press ENTER to listen to the song or
EXIT to cancel.
To activate/deactivate the song seek function:
1.
Press MENU
2.
Scroll to "
Song seek"
3.
Press ENTER to activate or deactivate the
function.
NOTE
When the song has ended, the radio will
remain tuned to the channel on which the
song was played.
Radio text
The text that is displayed about the song that
is currently playing can be changed. Use the
AUTO button or the menu to display the Artist,
Title, Composer
, or switch radio text off.
Advanced settings
This menu function enables you to make set-
tings on certain Sirius satellite radio functions.
To access this menu:
1.
Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Sirius menu.
3.
Select
Advanced Sirius settings.
WARNING
Settings should be made when the vehicle
is at a standstill.
The following settings can be made in the Sir-
ius menu.
•
Songs can be added to the song list
•
Channel skip settings can be made
•
Channel lock settings can be made
•
The channel access code can be displayed
or changed
•
Your Sirius ID can be displayed
Skip options
This function is used to remove a channel from
the list of available channels.
Skip current
1.
Select CHANNEL SKIP LIST and press
ENTER.
10 Audio
Radio functions
10
238
2. Select a category in the list and press
ENTER.
3. Skip channels in the list presented by
pressing ENTER or right arrow key.
Unskip all channels
This permanently removes all channels from
the skip list and makes them available for
selection.
Temp. unskip all ch.
This function will temporarily unskip all chan-
nels and make them available for selection. The
channels remain on the skip list and will again
be skipped the next time the ignition is
switched on.
Channel lock
Access to specific channels can be restricted
(locked). A locked channel will not provide
audio, song titles, or artist information.
NOTE
All channels are initially unlocked.
Locking a channel
1.
Select "
Sirius ID" in the menu and select
LOCK OPTIONS and press ENTER.
2.
Select
CHANNEL LOCK LIST and press
ENTER
3. Enter the channel access code and press
ENTER.
4. Select a category in the list and press
ENTER.
5. Lock channels in the list presented by
pressing ENTER or right arrow.
The channel is now locked and a checked box
will be displayed to indicate this. It will be nec-
essary to enter the channel access code1 in
order to listen to a locked channel.
Unlocking a channel:
A channel's access code1 is required to unlock
a channel.
Unlock all channels
This permanently removes all channels from
the locked list and makes them available for
selection.
Temp. unlock all ch.
This function will temporarily unlock all chan-
nels and make them available for selection. The
channels remain on the locked list and will
again be locked the next time the ignition is
switched on.
CHANGE CODE
This function makes it possible to change the
channel access code. The default code is
0000.
To change the code:
1.
Select
CHANGE CODE and press
ENTER.
2.
Enter the current code and press ENTER.
3.
Enter the code and press ENTER.
4.
Confirm the new code and press ENTER.
If an incorrect code is entered, the text
WRONG CODE! is displayed.
If you have forgotten the access code:
1.
Select "SIRIUS ID" in the Sirius settings
menu and press ENTER.
2.
Press and hold the ENTER button for
2 seconds.
3. The current code will be displayed.
Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with
assistance.
SIRUS ID
This function displays the 12-digit Sirius acti-
vation ID.
10 Audio
CD player/CD changer
10
``
239
CD function controls
G026367
MENU NAVIGATION CONTROL–press
the up or down arrow keys to scroll in a
menu, or the keys on the left/right sides of
the control to change CD tracks/fast for-
ward/back
Buttons for selecting a disc in the
optional CD changer
CD eject button
CD slot
MODE button
TUNING dial for selecting tracks
Playing a CD
Single CD player
Start the CD player by pressing the MODE but-
ton (5) and inserting a disc in the slot (4). If there
is already a disc inserted, it will begin to play.
NOTE
If a CD is in the slot when the audio system
is in CD mode, the CD will be played auto-
matically.
CD changer (option)
The CD changer can hold up to six discs.
1. Start the CD changer by pressing the
MODE button (5).
2. Select an empty position using the 1 – 6
buttons or the up/down keys on the MENU
NAVIGATION CONTROL. The display
shows which positions are empty.
3. Insert a disc into the slot (4).
NOTE
•
Ensure that INSERT DISC is displayed
before inserting a disc.
•
If a CD position in the changer contain-
ing a disc is selected, and the audio
system is in CD mode when it is
switched on, the CD will play automati-
cally.
CD eject
Eject from Single CD player
Press the eject button (3) to eject the disc.
Eject from CD changer
This function makes it possible to eject a single
disc, or to eject all of the discs in the changer.
•
Press the eject button (3) briefly to eject the
disc that is currently playing.
•
A longer press (more than two seconds)
starts the process of ejecting all of the
discs in the changer.
10 Audio
CD player/CD changer
10
240
NOTE
•
The EJECT ALL function can only be
used while the vehicle is at a standstill
and will be cancelled if the vehicle
begins to move.
•
For reasons of traffic safety, the ejected
CD must be removed within 12 seconds
or it will be automatically drawn back
into the slot and the CD player will enter
pause mode. Press the CD button to
restart the disc.
CD Pause
When the audio system volume is turned off
completely, the CD player will pause and will
resume playing when the volume is turned up
again.
Audio files
In addition to playing normal music CDs, the
CD player/changer can also play discs con-
taining files in mp3 or wma format.
NOTE
Certain discs that are copy protected can-
not be read by the player.
When a disc with audio files is inserted in the
player, the player scans the disc's folders
before it begins playing the files. The length of
time that this takes depends on the quality of
the disc.
Navigating the disc and playing tracks
If a disc with audio files is in the CD player,
press ENTER to display a list of folders on the
disc.
Use the up and down arrows in the navigation
control (see the illustration on page 239) to
move among the folders on the disc. Audio files
have the
symbol and folders containing
these files have the
symbol. Press
ENTER to play a selected folder or a file.
When the music file has been played, the
player will continue to play the rest of the files
in the current folder. When all of the files in the
folder have been played, the player will auto-
matically go to the next folder and play the files
in it.
Press the left or right arrow key on the naviga-
tion control if the entire name of the current
track does not fit in the display.
Changing tracks
Briefly press the left or right arrow keys on the
MENU NAVIGATION CONTROL to skip to the
previous or next track/file.
NOTE
The TUNING dial (6) (turn clockwise to go to
the next track/file, or counterclockwise to
go to the previous track/file) or the steering
wheel keypad can also be used for this pur-
pose.
Fast forward/back
Press and hold down the left or right arrows
keys in the MENU NAVIGATION CONTROL (or
the corresponding keys on the optional steer-
ing wheel keypad) to search within a track/file
or the whole disc. The search continues for as
long as the buttons are held down.
Random play
This function plays the tracks/files on a CD (or
on all of the CDs if the vehicle is equipped with
the optional CD changer) in random order
(shuffle).
Activating/deactivating the random
function-CD player
If a normal CD is being played:
1.
Press MENU followed by ENTER.
2.
Select Random and press ENTER.
If a CD with audio files is being played:
1.
Press MENU followed by ENTER.
2.
Select
Random and press ENTER.
10 Audio
CD player/CD changer
10
``
241
3.
Select
Disc or Folder and press ENTER.
Activating/deactivating the random
function-CD changer
If a normal CD is being played:
1.
Press MENU followed by ENTER.
2.
Select
Random and press ENTER.
3.
Select
Single disc or All discs and press
ENTER.
If a CD with audio files is being played:
1.
Press MENU followed by ENTER.
2.
Select
Random and press ENTER.
3.
Select Single disc or Folder and press
ENTER.
NOTE
CD changer only–you can only select the
next random track/file on the current disc.
Press the EXIT button to stop random play.
The random function is automatically deacti-
vated when another disc is selected.
Disc text (CD changer only)
Certain CDs contain information about the
disc, such as the titles of the tracks, etc. This
information can be shown in the display by
activating the DISC TEXT function.
1.
Press MENU. Select the menu for relevant
sound source and press ENTER.
2.
Select
Disc text in the menu and press
ENTER.
> If information is stored on the disc, it will
now appear in the display.
To deactivate this function, select
Disc text in
the menu and press ENTER.
Scan
This function plays the first 10 seconds of each
track/file on the CD.
•
Press SCAN.
•
Press EXIT or SCAN to stop the scan func-
tion and listen to an entire track/file.
CD eject
Single CD player
Press the eject button (3) to eject the disc.
CD changer
This function makes it possible to eject a single
disc, or to eject all of the discs in the changer.
•
Press the eject button (3) briefly to eject the
disc that is currently playing.
•
A longer press (more than two seconds)
starts the process of ejecting all of the
discs in the changer.
NOTE
•
The Eject all function can only be used
while the vehicle is at a standstill and will
be cancelled if the vehicle begins to
move.
•
For reasons of traffic safety, the ejected
CD must be removed within 12 seconds
or it will be automatically drawn back
into the slot and the CD player will enter
pause mode. Press the CD button to
restart the disc.
Compact disc care
Keep the following in mind when playing/han-
dling compact discs
•
Do not put tape or labels on the disc itself.
They could become stuck in the player.
•
CDR discs can cause listening problems
due to the quality of the disc or recording
equipment used.
•
DualDisc: The audio side of a DualDisc
(combined CD/DVD) does not meet CD
specifications and may not play in your
audio system.
•
Keep the discs clean. Wipe them with a
soft, clean, lint-free cloth, working from the
center outward. If necessary, dampen the
cloth with a neutral soap solution. Dry thor-
oughly before using.
10 Audio
CD player/CD changer
10
242
•
Never use cleaning spray or antistatic liq-
uid. Use only cleaners specifically made for
CDs.
•
Use discs of the correct size only (3.5"
discs should never be used).
•
Volvo does not recommend the use of
plastic outer rings on the disc.
•
Condensation may occur on discs/optical
components of the changer in cold winter
weather. The disc can be dried with a
clean, lint-free cloth. Optical components
in the CD changer may, however, take up
to one hour to dry off.
•
Never attempt to play a damaged CD.
•
When not in use, the discs should be
stored in their covers. Avoid storing discs
in excessive heat, direct sunlight or in
dusty locations.
10 Audio
Audio menu
10
243
FM1/FM2 menu
1. RADIOTEXT ON/OFF
2. ADVANCED RADIO SETTINGS
3. AUDIO SETTINGS
AM menu
1. AUDIO SETTINGS
CD menu
1. RANDOM
2. AUDIO SETTINGS
CD changer menu
1. RANDOM
2. DISC TEXT ON/OFF
3. AUDIO SETTINGS
AUX menu
1. AUX VOLUME
2. SOUND SETTINGS
10 Audio
Bluetooth hands-free connection
10
244
Introduction
G029503
System overview
Cell phone
Location of the microphone
Center console control panel and display
Bluetooth hands-free
This option makes it possible to set up a wire-
less connection between a Bluetooth-enabled
cell phone and the vehicle’s audio system. This
enables the audio system to function as a
hands-free connection and allows you to
remote-control a number of the phone’s func-
tions. The microphone used by this system is
located in the ceiling console (2). The buttons
and other controls on the cell phone can
always be used regardless of whether or not
the phone is connected to the hands-free sys-
tem.
NOTE
Not all cell phones are fully compatible with
the hands-free system. A list of compatible
phones is available at your Volvo retailer or
at www.volvocars.com
WARNING
Never use the hands-free feature or any
other device in your vehicle in a way that
distracts you from the task of driving safely.
Distraction can lead to a serious accident.
Getting started
Use the controls in the center console (3) to
access, navigate and make selections in the
hands-free system’s menus (see page 248).
Activating/deactivating
A short press on the PHONE button in the cen-
ter console activates the hands-free system.
The text TELEPHONE will appear at the top of
the display to indicate that the audio system is
in telephone mode.
The
symbol indicates that the hands-free
system is active.
A long press on the PHONE button deactivates
the hands-free system and disconnects the
cell phone.
Connecting cell phones
The procedure for connecting a cell phone var-
ies, depending on the phone itself, and on
whether or not the phone has been previously
connected.
If this is the first time the phone is to be con-
nected to the hands-free system, proceed as
follows:
Alternative 1–using the vehicle's menus
1.
Activate the cell phone’s Bluetooth func-
tion (refer to the phone’s owner’s manual if
necessary) or go to www.volvocars.com
2.
Activate the vehicle’s Bluetooth hands-
free system by briefly pressing the
PHONE button.
>
Add phone will be displayed. If one or
more cell phones are already registered
in the system, they will also be dis-
played.
3.
Select
Add phone.
10 Audio
Bluetooth hands-free connection
10
``
245
> The audio system will search for cell
phones that are in range. This search
takes approximately 30 seconds. Any
phones detected will be displayed with
their Bluetooth names. The hands-free
system’s Bluetooth name will appear
in the cell phone’s display as
My Car.
4. Select one of the cell phones shown in the
audio system’s (center console) display.
5. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter the
digits shown in the audio system’s display.
Alternative 2–using the cell phone’s menus
1. Activate the hands-free system by briefly
pressing the PHONE button in the center
console. If there is a cell phone connected,
disconnect it from the hands-free system
(by pressing PHONE in the center console
for several seconds).
2. Perform a search using the cell phone’s
Bluetooth function (consult the cell
phone’s owner’s manual if necessary).
3.
Select
My Car in the list of devices shown
in the cell phone’s display.
4. When prompted, enter the PIN code 1234
in the cell phone.
5.
Connect to My Car from the cell phone.
The cell phone will be registered and will be
connected automatically to the audio system
while the text
Synchronising is displayed. For
more information on synchronizing a cell
phone, see page 247.
When a connection has been established, the
symbol and the cell phone’s Bluetooth
name will be displayed. The cell phone can
now be controlled from the audio system.
Making a call
1.
Ensure that
TELEPHONE is shown at the
top of the center console display and that
the
symbol is visible (by pressing briefly
on PHONE on the center console).
2. Dial the desired phone number or use the
phone book (see page 247).
3.
Press ENTER.
End the call by pressing EXIT.
Disconnecting the cell phone
The cell phone is automatically disconnected
from the audio system if it is moved out of
range. For more information about connec-
tions, see page 244.
The cell phone can be manually disconnected
from the hands-free system by pressing
PHONE. The hands-free system is also deac-
tivated when the ignition is switched off (or if
the driver’s door is opened on vehicles equip-
ped with the optional keyless drive).
When the cell phone is disconnected from the
hands-free system, a call in progress can be
continued using the cell phone’s own speaker
and microphone.
NOTE
Certain cell phones may require confirma-
tion from the phone’s keypad when a call is
transferred from hands-free to the cell
phone.
Handling calls
Incoming calls
Press ENTER to answer a call, even if the audio
system is currently in e.g., CD or FM mode.
Press EXIT to defer a call.
Automatic answer
This function means that incoming calls will be
answered automatically. Activate or deactivate
the function in the menu system under Phone
settings Call options Automatic
answer.
10 Audio
Bluetooth hands-free connection
10
246
Call settings
While a call is in progress, press MENU or
ENTER on the center console to access the
following functions:
•
Microphone off–mute the audio system’s
microphone.
•
Transfer call to mobile–transfer the call
from hands-free to the cell phone.
•
Phone book–this feature enables you to
search for a stored telephone number.
NOTE
•
On certain cell phones, the connection
is broken when the mute function is
used, which is normal. If this happens,
the hands-free system will prompt you
to reconnect.
•
A new call cannot be initiated while
another call is in progress.
Sound settings
Call volume
Call volume can be adjusted when the hands-
free system is activated. Use the buttons in the
steering wheel keypad or the audio system’s
volume control.
Audio system volume
While a phone call is in progress, volume for
the audio system can be adjusted in the normal
way with the audio system's volume control. In
order to adjust volume during a phone call, the
audio system must be switched to one of the
other modes (FM, CD, etc).
Audio system sound can be automatically
muted when a phone call is received in Phone
settings
Sounds and volume Mute
radio and adjust the volume with the
/
keys on the center console.
Ringing volume
Go to Phone settings Sounds and volume
Ring volume and adjust the volume with
the
/ keys on the center console.
Ringing tones
The hands-free system’s integrated ringing
tones can be selected in Phone settings
Sounds and volume Ring signal Ring
signal 1,2,3....
NOTE
The connected cell phone’s ring tone is not
switched off when one of the hands-free
system's ringing tones is used.
If you prefer to use the connected cell phone’s
ring tone
1
, go to Phone settings Sounds
and volume Ring signal Use mobile
phone signal
More information about registering
and connecting cell phones
A maximum of 5 cell phones can be registered
in the hands-free system. Registration only
needs to be done once for each phone. After
registration, the cell phone no longer needs to
be in sight or searchable. Only one cell phone
can be connected to hands-free at a time.
Phones can be unregistered in Bluetooth
Remove telephone
Automatic connection
When the hands-free system is active and the
most recently connected cell phone is within
range, it is detected automatically. When the
1
Not supported by all cell phones
10 Audio
Bluetooth hands-free connection
10
``
247
audio system searches for the most recently
connected phone, this phone’s name appears
in the display. To manually connect a different
cell phone, press EXIT.
Manual connection
To connect a phone other than the one that
was most recently connected or to switch
between cell phones that are already regis-
tered in the hands-free system:
1. Put the audio system in telephone mode.
2.
Press PHONE in the center console and
select one of the phones on the list.
A connection can also be established in the
menu system under Bluetooth
Connect
phone or Change phone.
Phone book
In order to use the hands-free system’s phone
book (list of contacts), TELEPHONE must be
displayed at the top of the center console dis-
play and the symbol must be visible.
The audio system stores a copy of the phone
book of each registered cell phone. The phone
book is automatically copied each time a
phone is connected. This function can be acti-
vated in Phone settings
Synchronise
phone book. Searches for contacts are only
made in the phone book of the currently con-
nected cell phone.
NOTE
If a particular cell phone does not support
copying of the phone book,
List is empty
will be displayed when copying has been
completed.
If the phone book contains information about
someone who is trying to call you, this infor-
mation will be shown in the display.
Searching for contacts
The easiest way to search for a contact in the
phone book is to press and hold any of the
buttons 2–9. This starts a search based on the
first letter on the button that has been pressed.
The phone book can also be accessed by
pressing the navigation buttons
/ on the
center console or by pressing
/ on the
steering wheel keypad. A search can also be
made in the phone book’s search menu in
Phone book
Search:
1. Enter the first letter of the contact’s name
and press ENTER or simply press ENTER.
2. Select the desired contact and press
ENTER to make a call to that person.
Voice control
If the cell phone that is currently connected
allows calls to be made via voice commands,
this function can be used by pressing and hold-
ing ENTER.
Voice mail number
The phone number to your voice mail can be
changed in the menu Phone settings
Call
options
Voice mail number. If no number
has been stored, this menu can be accessed
by a prolonged press on button 1. Once a
phone number has been stored, press and hold
1 to dial this number.
Call lists
Lists of calls in a particular cell phone are cop-
ied to the hands-free system each time that
phone is connected. These lists are then upda-
ted while the phone is connected. Press
ENTER to show the most recently dialed num-
bers. Other call lists can be found under Call
register
.
NOTE
Certain cell phones display the list of the
most recently dialed numbers in reverse
order.
10 Audio
Bluetooth hands-free connection
10
248
Entering text
Text is entered by using the number buttons in
the center console. Press a button once to
enter the first letter on the button, twice to enter
the second letter, etc. Continue to press the
button to display other characters.
Press EXIT briefly to erase a character. Press
and hold EXIT to erase all of the characters that
have been entered. Use the
/ buttons on
the center console to navigate among the char-
acters.
Button Function
Space .1-? ! , : " ' ( )
A B C 2 Ä Å À Æ Ç
D E F 3 È É
G H I 4 Ì
J K L 5
M N O 6 Ñ Ö Ò Ø
P Q R S 7 ß
Button Function
T U V 8 Ü Ù
W X Y Z 9
Press briefly if two characters are
to be entered in succession from
the same button.
+ 0 @ * # & $ £ / %
Shift between uppercase and
lowercase letters
Bluetooth menus
1. Missed calls
2. Received calls
3 Dialed calls
4. Phone book
4.1. Search
4.2. Copy fr. mobile phone
5. Bluetooth...
5.1. Change phone
5.2. Connect phone
5.3. Disconnect phone
5.4. Connect fr. mobile phone
6. Phone settings
6.1. Call options
6.1.2. Automatic answer
6.1.3. Voice mail number
6.2. Sounds and volume
6.3. IDIS
6.4. Synchronize phone book
10 Audio
10
249
G000000
250
Label information.................................................................................. 252
Dimensions and weights....................................................................... 254
Fuel, oils, and fluids.............................................................................. 257
Engine oil............................................................................................... 259
Engine specifications............................................................................ 260
Electrical system................................................................................... 262
Three-way catalytic converter............................................................... 264
Volvo programs..................................................................................... 265
11
SPECIFICATIONS
11 Specifications
Label information
11
252
G032542
G026362
11 Specifications
Label information
11
253
Model plate
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Codes for
color and upholstery, etc.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS) specifications (USA)
and Ministry of Transport (CMVSS)
standards (Canada)
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable
safety standards, as evidenced by the certifi-
cation label on the facing side of the driver's
door. For further information regarding these
regulations, please consult your Volvo retailer.
Loads and Tire Pressures
The appearance of the decal will vary, depend-
ing on the market for which the vehicle is
intended.
Canadian models have the upper decal
U.S. models have the lower decal.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
1
The VIN plate is located on the top left surface
of the dashboard. The VIN is also stamped on
the right hand door pillar.
Vehicle Emission Control Information
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable
emission standards, as evidenced by the cer-
tification label on the underside of the hood.
For further information regarding these regula-
tions, please consult your Volvo retailer.
1
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) should always be quoted in correspondence concerning your vehicle with the retailer and when ordering parts.
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
11
254
Dimensions
G015593
Position Dimension in. (mm)
A Wheelbase 103.9 in. (264 cm)
B Length 167.4 in. (425 cm)
C Load length, floor, seatback down 58.7 in. (149 cm)
D Load length, floor 26 in. (66 cm)
E Height 57 in. (145 cm)
F Track, front 60.9 in. (155 cm)
G Track, rear 60.8 in. (154 cm)
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
11
255
Position Dimension in. (mm)
H Width 70.2 in. (178 cm)
I Width encl. door mirrors 80.3 in. (204 cm)
Weights
Category USA Canada
Gross vehicle weight
Non-turbo: -
Turbo manual: 4320 lbs
Turbo automatic: 4340 lbs
1840 kg
1960 kg
1970 kg
Capacity weight
Non-turbo: -
Turbo: 1040 lbs
325 kg
470 kg
Permissible axle weight, front
Non-turbo: -
Turbo: 2330 lbs
1060 kg
1060 kg
Permissible axle weight, rear
Non-turbo: -
Turbo: 2160 lbs
900 kg
980 kg
Curb weight
All models: 3155–3220 lbs 1385–1455 kg
Max. roof load
All models: 165 lbs All models: 75 kg
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
11
256
CAUTION
The maximum permissible axle loads and/
or the gross vehicle weight must not be
exceeded.
WARNING
When adding accessories, equipment, lug-
gage and other cargo to your vehicle, the
total capacity weight must not be exceeded.
11 Specifications
Fuel, oils, and fluids
11
``
257
Specifications and capacities
Category Specification Capacity
Fuel tank
Octane rating: unleaded gasoline, minimum
octane requirement AKI 87, recommended rat-
ing AKI 91 or above.
15.9 US gallons (60 liters)
Models with engine code 39 have a fuel tank
capacity of 14 US gallons (53 liters). This code
is the 6th and 7th digits from the left in your
vehicle's VIN number. see page 252 for the
location of the VIN plate.
Engine oil (with filter replacement)
See page 259 for information on engine oil
specifications.
6.1 US quarts (5.8 liters)
Automatic transmission oil
Non-turbo engine: JWS 3309 8.19 US quarts (7.75 liters)
Manual transmission oil
BOT 130 5-speed: 2.2 US quarts (2.1 liters)
6-speed: 2.1 US quarts (2.0 liters) – turbo mod-
els
Coolant
Volvo original coolant/antifreeze (50/50 mixture
of water and anti-freeze)
10.5 US quarts (10 liters) – models with auto-
matic transmission
10 US quarts (9.5 liters) – models with manual
transmission
Brake fluid
DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F (280 °C), P/N
9437433
0.63 US quarts (0.6 liters)
Power steering fluid
WSS M2C204-A or equivalent 1.3 US quarts (1.2 liters) – system and reservoir
combined
11 Specifications
Fuel, oils, and fluids
11
258
Category Specification Capacity
Washer fluid reservoir
Use washer fluid solvent in cold weather con-
ditions.
6.8 US quarts (6.5 liters)
Air conditioning system
Refrigerant – R134a 1.2 lbs. (530 grams)
NOTE
The transmission oil does not normally need
to be changed during the service life of the
vehicle. However, it may be necessary to
replace the oil if the vehicle is often driven
in areas of sustained temperature extremes
(hot or cold), when towing a trailer over long
distances, for prolonged driving in moun-
tainous areas, or if the vehicle is often driven
short distances in temperatures under 40 °F
(5 °C).
11 Specifications
Engine oil
11
259
Oil specifications
Engine oil must meet the minimum ILSAC
specification GF-4, API SL, or ACEA A1/B1.
Lower quality oils may not offer the same fuel
economy, engine performance, or engine pro-
tection.
Volume: 6.1 US qts (5.8 liters).
Volume between the MIN and Max marks on
the dipstick: approximately 1.4 US qts (1.3 lit-
ers).
Volvo recommends Castrol.
Depending on your driving habits, premium or
synthetic oils may provide superior fuel econ-
omy and engine protection. Consult your Volvo
retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician for recommendations on premium
or synthetic oils.
Oil additives must not be used.
NOTE
Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is
changed at the normal service intervals.
This oil is only used at customer request, at
additional charge. Please consult a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
Oil viscosity (stable ambient
temperatures)
G023491
Operation in hot climates
When temperatures exceed 104° F (40° C) in
your area, Volvo recommends, for the protec-
tion of your engine, that you use a heavier
weight oil, such as such as SAE 5W-40 or
0W-40. See the viscosity chart.
Operation in temperate climates
Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life.
Under normal use when temperatures do not
exceed 104° F (40° C), SAE 5W-30 will provide
good fuel economy and engine protection. See
the viscosity chart.
Extreme engine operation
Synthetic oils meeting SAE 0W-30 or 0W-40
and complying with oil quality requirements are
recommended for driving in areas of sustained
temperature extremes (hot or cold), when tow-
ing a trailer over long distances, and for pro-
longed driving in mountainous areas.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
symbol
G022917
The API Service Symbol "donut" is divided into
three parts:
•
The upper section describes the oil's per-
formance level.
•
The center identifies the oil's viscosity.
•
The lower section indicates whether the oil
has demonstrated energy-conserving
properties in a standard test in comparison
to a reference oil.
11 Specifications
Engine specifications
11
260
Engine designation
B5244S4
A
B5254T7
Output
B
kW/rps
125/100 169/83
hp/rpm
168/6000 227/5000
Torque
Nm/rps
230/73 320/25-80
ft. lbs./rpm
170/4400 236/1500-4800
No. of cylinders
5 5
Displacement (liters/cubic inches)
2.44/148.6 2.52/153.8
Bore (mm/in.)
83/3.27 83/3.27
Stroke (mm/in.)
90/3.54 93.2/3.67
Compression ratio
10.3:1 9.0:1
Spark plugs
type
Volvo kit no. 30650843 Volvo kit no. 30650379
gap inches/mm
(3x) 0.024 ± 0.004 in./0.6 ± 0.1mm 0.027in./0.7mm
tightening torque ft. lbs./Nm
22.5 ft. lbs./30 Nm 22.5 ft. lbs./30 Nm
A
Certain markets
B
The engine specifications for horsepower and torque listed in this table are based on the use of premium fuel.
11 Specifications
Engine specifications
11
261
Charge air cooler (Intercooler)
Turbocharged engines employ a turbo-com-
pressor to force air into the engine inlet mani-
fold and a charge air cooler to cool the
compressed inlet air. The resulting increase in
air flow raises pressure in the intake manifold
and increases engine power over that devel-
oped by the normally-aspirated engine. The
charge air cooler (which resembles a radiator)
is located between the turbo-compressor and
inlet manifold.
Fuel system
The engine is equipped with a multiport fuel
injection system.
11 Specifications
Electrical system
11
262
General information
12-volt system with voltage controlled gener-
ator. Single wire system in which the chassis
and engine block are used as conductors,
grounded on the chassis.
Battery
Voltage 12 V 12 V
Cold start
capacity
(CCA)
600 A
A
700 A
B
Reserve
capacity
(RC)
120 min 135 min
Capacity
(Ah)
70 80
A
Models equipped with the High Performance audio system
B
Models equipped with the Premium Sound audio system,
the Volvo Navigation System and/or keyless drive
If the battery must be replaced, replace it with
one with the same cold start capacity and
reserve capacity as the original (see the decal
on the battery).
WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the state of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
Bulbs used in the car
Bulb Output Type
Low beam headlight 55W H7
55W H9
11 Specifications
Electrical system
11
263
Bulb Output Type
Extra high beam (models with Bi-Xenon
headlights only)
55W H7
Brake light, back-up light, rear fog light 21W P21W
Turn signal, front/rear (applies to models with Bi-Xenon
or halogen headlights)
21W PY21W
24W P21/5W
Rear parking light, side marker light 5W P21/W5
Footwell lighting, cargo compartment light, license plate lighting 5W C5W
Vanity mirror 1.2W Festoon
Front parking light, side turn signal 5W W5W
Front fog light (option) 55W H11
Glove compartment light 3W Festoon
NOTE
For information regarding any other bulbs
not mentioned in this section, please con-
tact your Volvo retailer or a trained and
authorized Volvo service technician.
11 Specifications
Three-way catalytic converter
11
264
Three-way catalytic converter –
general information
•
Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain
engine malfunctions, particularly involving
the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition
systems, may cause unusually high three-
way catalytic converter temperatures. Do
not continue to operate your vehicle if you
detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of
power or other unusual operating condi-
tions, such as engine overheating or back-
firing. A properly tuned engine will help
avoid malfunctions that could damage the
three-way catalytic converter.
•
Do not park your vehicle over combustible
materials, such as grass or leaves, which
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system and cause such materials to ignite
under certain wind and weather condi-
tions.
•
Excessive starter cranking (in excess of
one minute), or an intermittently firing or
flooded engine can cause three-way cata-
lytic converter or exhaust system over-
heating.
•
Remember that tampering or unauthorized
modifications to the engine, the Electronic
Control Module, or the vehicle may be ille-
gal and can cause three-way catalytic con-
verter or exhaust system overheating. This
includes:
NOTE
Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with
three-way catalytic converters.
11 Specifications
Volvo programs
11
265
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance
Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON
CALL roadside assistance. Additional informa-
tion, features, and benefits are described in a
separate information package in your glove
compartment.
If you require assistance, dial:
American customers: 1-800-638-6586
(1-800-63-VOLVO)
Canadian customers: 1-800-263-0475
Technician certification
In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo sup-
ports certification by the National Institute for
Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certi-
fied technicians have demonstrated a high
degree of competence in specific areas.
Besides passing exams, each technician must
also have worked in the field for two or more
years before a certificate is issued. These pro-
fessional technicians are best able to analyze
vehicle problems and perform the necessary
maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at
peak operating condition.
12 Index
12
266
1, 2, 3 ...
12-volt sockets.......................................... 62
A
A/C (air conditioning)................................. 90
ABS (anti-lock brake system).................. 149
Airbags
front...................................................... 22
inflatable curtain................................... 30
side impact........................................... 29
Airbag system............................................ 22
Air conditioning.......................................... 90
Air distribution table................................... 99
Air vents..................................................... 92
Alarm system........................................... 129
turning off sensors.............................. 130
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................. 149
Approach lighting....................................... 83
Audio files................................................ 240
Audio system
audio functions................................... 230
automatic sound control..................... 233
AUX port............................................. 230
CD changer......................................... 239
CD player/changer.............................. 239
compact disc care.............................. 241
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II............... 232
equalizer............................................. 233
menu settings..................................... 243
radio functions.................................... 234
selecting a sound source.................... 230
Sirius satellite radio............................ 235
sound settings.................................... 232
steering wheel keypad........................ 231
storing radio stations.......................... 234
USB/iPOD connector.......................... 231
Auto-dim rearview mirror........................... 77
Autolock..................................................... 82
Automatic locking retractor....................... 36
Automatic sound control......................... 233
Automatic transmission........................... 146
kickdown............................................ 147
oil........................................................ 257
shiftlock override................................ 148
Automatic transmission - Geartronic....... 147
AUX port.................................................. 230
Axle weight...................................... 175, 255
B
Backrest, rear seat, folding...................... 111
Bass......................................................... 232
Battery
maintenance....................................... 211
remote control, replacing................... 120
specifications...................................... 262
warning symbols................................. 211
Battery – replacing................................... 211
Black Box (Vehicle Event Data)............... 200
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)..... 157
Booster cushion
accessory............................................. 43
Brake fluid........................................ 209, 257
Brake lights................................................ 63
Brake system
anti-lock brakes (ABS)........................ 149
emergency brake assistance.............. 150
fluid..................................................... 209
general information............................. 149
Bulbs
headlights........................................... 213
list of................................................... 262
Bulbs, replacing....................................... 213
12 Index
12
267
C
Capacities, fluids..................................... 257
Capacity weight............................... 175, 255
Cargo area
steel grid............................................. 113
Cargo area cover............................. 113, 114
Cargo area net......................................... 115
Catalytic converter, three-way................. 264
CD changer.............................................. 239
CD player................................................. 239
Cell phone, hands-free connection......... 244
Central locking system - remote control. 118
Chains...................................................... 177
Changing a wheel.................................... 181
Child restraints
recalls and registration......................... 46
Child restraint systems.............................. 37
booster cushions.................................. 43
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors........................ 44
top tether anchors................................ 45
Child safety................................................ 35
booster cushions.................................. 43
child restraint systems.......................... 37
Climate system
air distribution....................................... 99
air vents................................................ 92
Electronic Climate Control.................... 96
manual climate control......................... 93
passenger compartment filter.............. 90
refrigerant..................................... 90, 257
Climate system, general information......... 90
Clock
setting................................................... 82
Coat hanger............................................. 108
Cold weather precautions........................ 135
Compact disc care.................................. 241
Compass in rearview mirror....................... 77
Conserving electrical current................... 136
Coolant.................................................... 257
changing............................................. 208
checking level of................................. 208
Courtesy lighting...................................... 106
Crash mode............................................... 34
Cruise control............................................ 69
Cup holders..................................... 107, 109
Curb weight..................................... 175, 255
D
Detachable key blade.............................. 120
Dimensions.............................................. 254
Disabling the passenger's side front air-
bag............................................................. 26
Disconnecting the front passenger’s air-
bag............................................................. 26
Display....................................................... 60
Dolby Pro Logic II (DPL II)........................ 232
Door mirrors............................................... 78
Driving economically................................ 134
Driving through water.............................. 135
E
Economical driving.................................. 134
Electrical current – conserving................ 136
Electrically operated moonroof.................. 80
Electrical system...................................... 262
Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD)........................................................ 150
Electronic Climate Control......................... 91
air distribution table.............................. 99
12 Index
12
268
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) - option. 96
Emergency brake....................................... 75
Emergency locking retractor...................... 36
Emergency starting.................................. 155
Emergency towing................................... 153
Emission inspection readiness................ 202
Engine
specifications...................................... 260
starting................................................ 142
starting with keyless drive.................. 144
Engine compartment overview................ 205
Engine oil................................................. 206
changing............................................. 206
checking............................................. 206
specifications...................................... 259
volumes.............................................. 257
Equalizer, audio system........................... 233
Eyelets for anchoring loads..................... 113
F
Federal Clean Air Act............................... 200
Flat tires
changing............................................. 181
repairing with tire sealing system....... 183
Fluids and oils.......................................... 257
FM1/FM2 menu....................................... 234
Fog lights
front...................................................... 63
rear........................................................ 64
Front airbags.............................................. 22
disconnecting passenger’s side airbag 26
Front fog lights........................................... 63
Front park assist...................................... 161
Front seats............................................... 102
accessing the rear seat...................... 102
manually operated.............................. 102
power.................................................. 103
Fuel filler door
unlocking.............................................. 64
Fuel gauge................................................. 53
Fuel requirements.................................... 138
Fuel tank volume...................................... 257
Fuses, replacing....................................... 221
G
Gasoline requirements............................. 138
Geartronic................................................ 147
Generator................................................. 262
Glossary of tire terminology..................... 174
Glove compartment................................. 108
locking................................................ 127
Gross vehicle weight (GVW)............ 175, 255
H
Hand brake (parking brake)....................... 75
Hands-free connection (cell phone) (Cell
phone, hands-free connection)................ 244
Hazard warning flashers............................ 74
Headlights.................................................. 63
changing bulbs................................... 213
high and low beams............................. 65
high beam flash.................................... 65
Headlight washers..................................... 71
High beam flash......................................... 65
High beams................................................ 65
Home safe lighting............................... 65, 83
12 Index
12
269
Hood, opening......................................... 204
I
Ignition switch.......................................... 141
Immobilizer.............................................. 142
Immobilizer (start inhibitor)...................... 118
Indicator and warning symbols............ 53, 55
Inflatable Curtain........................................ 30
Inflation pressure..................................... 168
Inflation pressure, checking..................... 169
Inflation pressure table
Canadian models................................ 171
US models.......................................... 170
Information display.............................. 53, 60
messages in.......................................... 60
Information symbol.................................... 55
Inspection, preparing for......................... 202
Inspection readiness................................ 202
Instrument overview.................................. 50
Instrument panel.................................. 50, 53
Instrument panel lighting........................... 64
Interior lighting......................................... 106
iPOD connector (audio system)............... 231
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors............................. 44
J
Jacket hanger.......................................... 108
Jump starting........................................... 155
K
Key blade......................................... 120, 124
Keyless drive
location of antennas (pacemaker warn-
ing)...................................................... 125
locking and unlocking the vehicle...... 123
power seat memory............................ 124
starting the engine.............................. 144
Keylock.................................................... 142
Kickdown................................................. 147
L
Label information..................................... 252
LATCH (ISOFIX) anchors........................... 44
Liftgate wiper........................................... 210
Liftgate wiper/washer................................ 72
Lighting panel............................................ 63
Load anchoring eyelets........................... 113
Loading the vehicle
roof loads............................................ 156
Locking
from the inside.................................... 127
glove compartment............................. 127
Locking the vehicle.................................. 123
Long distance trips.................................. 136
Lug nuts (wheel nuts)............................... 179
M
Maintenance............................................ 200
performed by the owner..................... 202
Manual climate control.............................. 93
Manual transmission................................ 145
Mirrors.................................................. 77, 78
12 Index
12
270
Model plate.............................................. 253
Moonroof................................................... 80
Motor oil........................................... 206, 259
checking............................................. 206
N
Net in cargo area..................................... 115
O
Occupant safety........................................ 16
Occupant weight sensor............................ 26
Octane recommendations....................... 138
Oil............................................................. 206
changing............................................. 206
checking............................................. 206
On Call Roadside Assistance.................. 265
Opening the hood.................................... 204
Owner maintenance................................. 202
P
Panel lighting, instrument.......................... 64
Park assist............................................... 161
Parking brake............................................. 75
Parking lights............................................. 63
Passenger’s side front airbag, disabling. . . 26
Periodic owner-performed maintenance. 202
Permissible axle weight........................... 175
Personal settings....................................... 82
Power door mirrors.................................... 78
Power front seat...................................... 103
memory function................................. 104
Power moonroof........................................ 80
Power steering fluid................................. 209
Power windows......................................... 76
Pregnancy, using seat belts during........... 19
R
Radio
Sirius satellite radio............................ 235
Radio functions........................................ 234
Rain sensor - windshield wipers................ 72
Rear fog light............................................. 64
Rear park assist....................................... 161
Rear seat backrests, folding down.......... 111
Rearview mirror.......................................... 77
auto-dim function................................. 77
Rearview mirror with compass (option)..... 77
Recalls, child restraints.............................. 46
Refrigerant (A/C system).................... 90, 257
Refueling.................................................. 140
fuel tank volume................................. 257
Registering child restraints........................ 46
Remote control........................................ 118
battery replacement............................ 120
functions............................................. 118
key blade............................................ 120
Replacing fuses....................................... 221
Reporting safety defects
Canada................................................. 17
USA....................................................... 16
Roof loads................................................ 156
Rotating tires........................................... 180
12 Index
12
271
S
Safety, occupant........................................ 16
Safety defects, reporting
Canada................................................. 17
USA....................................................... 16
Seat belt
reminder................................................ 20
Seat belts................................................... 18
Automatic locking retractor/Emergency
locking retractor.................................... 36
buckling................................................ 18
guides................................................... 19
maintenance......................................... 20
pretensioners........................................ 18
unbuckling............................................ 18
use during pregnancy........................... 19
Seats, front.............................................. 102
Shiftlock
override............................................... 148
Side door mirrors....................................... 78
Side impact airbags................................... 29
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags....... 29
Sirius satellite radio.................................. 235
Snow chains............................................ 177
Snow tires................................................ 177
Sound control, automatic........................ 233
Sound settings, audio system................. 232
Spare tire................................................. 178
Starting the engine................................... 142
with keyless drive............................... 144
Start inhibitor (immobilizer).............. 118, 142
Steering wheel
adjusting............................................... 74
keypad................................................ 231
Storage compartments............................ 107
Studded tires........................................... 177
Sunroof (moonroof).................................... 80
Supplemental restraint system.................. 21
T
Tachometer................................................ 53
Tailgate wipers......................................... 210
Telephone (cellular), hands-free connec-
tion (Cell phone, hands-free connection). 244
Temporary spare tire............................... 178
Three-way catalytic converter................. 264
Tire inflation............................................. 168
Tire inflation pressure
Canadian models................................ 171
US models.......................................... 170
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 188
Tires......................................................... 166
age...................................................... 167
changing............................................. 181
changing from summer to winter........ 180
designations....................................... 172
glossary of terms................................ 174
improving economy............................ 167
inflation............................................... 168
inflation pressure, checking................ 169
inflation pressure table, Canadian mod-
els....................................................... 171
inflation pressure table, US models.... 170
load ratings......................................... 169
rotation............................................... 180
snow................................................... 177
spare................................................... 178
speed ratings...................................... 169
storing................................................. 166
studded............................................... 177
tire pressure monitoring system......... 188
tire sealing system.............................. 183
tread wear indicator............................ 167
12 Index
12
272
uniform tire quality grading................. 176
winter driving...................................... 177
Tire sealing system.................................. 183
Top tether anchors (child restraint sys-
tems).......................................................... 45
Towing the vehicle................................... 153
Transmission
Geartronic........................................... 147
manual................................................ 145
shiftlock override................................ 148
Tread wear indicator................................ 167
Treble....................................................... 232
Trip computer............................................ 67
Trips, long distance................................. 136
Turn signals............................................... 65
indicator lights...................................... 53
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading................... 176
V
Vehicle dimensions.................................. 254
Vehicle Event Data................................... 200
Vehicle loading......................................... 175
roof loads............................................ 156
Vehicle maintenance
performed by the owner..................... 202
Vehicle towing.......................................... 153
Vehicle weights........................................ 255
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number)......... 253
Volvo Inflatable Curtain.............................. 30
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance........ 265
W
Warning flashers, hazard........................... 74
Warning symbol......................................... 55
Warranties................................................ 200
Washer fluid..................................... 208, 257
Washer fluid reservoir...................... 205, 208
Water, driving through............................. 135
Weights.................................................... 255
Wheel nuts............................................... 179
Wheels..................................................... 166
changing............................................. 181
storing................................................. 166
Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)....... 32
Windows
power.................................................... 76
Windshield washer fluid reservoir............ 205
Windshield wiper blades.......................... 210
Windshield wipers...................................... 71
rains sensor.......................................... 72
Winter tires............................................... 177
Wiper blades
replacing liftgate wiper....................... 210
replacing windshield wipers............... 210
Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dcIE&%&()JH68VcVYV!6I%-'%!Eg^ciZY^cHlZYZc!<iZWdg\'%%-!8deng^\]i'%%%"'%%-Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc
